Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout150 Fulton St 04-1646 (a) (2)1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS A A.B. ANCHOR BOLT FL FLOOR PR PAR A/C AR CONDITION FFL FINISHED FLOOR LINE PT POINT ACOUS. ACOUSTICAL FLASH FLASHING P.T. PRESSURE TREATED ADJ. ADJUSTABLE, ADJACENT FR FRAME P.T.D. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR (SLAB) FTG FOOTING PVC POLY VINYL CLORIDE AH. ACCESS HATCH FURR FURRING mu NR HANDLER UNIT FUT FUTURE Q Q.T. QUARRY TILE A- ALUMINUM F.W. FLUSH WOOD ALT ALTERNATE R R RADIUS, RISER MOD. ANODIZED G GA GUAGE RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A.P. ACCESS PANEL GAL GALLON RD ROOF DRAIN APPROX APPROXIMATE GA_V GALVANIZED RECP RECEPTACLE ARCH. ARCHITECT G.B. GRAB BAR REF REFERENCE AUTO AUTOMATIC G.M. GALVANIZED METH_ REFR REFRIGERATOR GND GROUND REG REGLET B B.G. BUMPER GUARD GYP GYPSUM REINF REINFORCEMENT BILK BLOCK REQ REQUIRED B 0 BOTTOM OF H HB HOSE BIBB REV REVISION BLDG BUILDING H.C. HOLLOW CORE RM ROOM BM BEAM HDW. HARDWARE RD ROUGH OPENING BOT. BOTTOM HDWD. HARDWOOD B.U.R. BUILT UP ROOF HT. HEIGHT S SC SOLID CORE HM HOLLOW META- SCHED SCHEDULE C CAB, CABINET HORIZ HORIZONTAL S.D. SOAP DISPENSER C.B. CATCH BASIN H.PT. HIGH POINT SEA_ SEALANT CER. CERAMIC HTG. HEATING SECT SECTION C.G. CORNER GUARD HVAC HEATING,VENTILATING, SF SQUARE FEET C.I. CAST IRON & AR CONDITIONING SQ. FT. SQUARE FEET C.J. CONTROL JOINT SHT SHEET CL CENTER LINE I ID INSIDE DIAMETER SIM SIMILAR CLG. CEILING INCL INCLUDING S.M. SHEET METAL CLO. CLOSET INSUL INSULATION SPEC SPECIFICATION CLR. CLEAR INT INTERIOR SPF SOUNDPROOF CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT INV INVERT SS STAINLESS STEEL COL COLUMN STD STANDARD CONC. CONCRETE J JAN JANITOR STL STEEL CONST. CONSTRUCTION JT JOINT STOR STORAGE CONT. CONTINUOUS STRL STRUCTURAL CONTR. CONTRACTOR L L LENGTH SUSP SUSPENDED CORR. CORRIDOR LAM LAMINATE S.Y. SQUARE YARD CO CLEAT OUT LAV LAVATORY CT CERAMIC TILE LF LINEAR FEET T TLT TOILET CTR COUNTER,CENTER LKR LOCKER TBL TABLE CW COLD WATER LT.WT. LIGHT WEIGHT TEL TELEPHONE CU CONDENSING UNIT LBL LABEL TEMP TEMPERED THK THICK D DBL DOUBLE M MAS MASONRY TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER DEPT DEPARTMENT MAX MAXIMUM TV TELEVISION DET DETAL MIN MINIMUM TYP TYPICAL OFDRINKING FOUNTAIN MECH MECHANICAL DIA DIAMETER MTL METAL U UC UNDER COUNTER DIM DIMENSION MFG MANUFACTURER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DISP DISPENSER M.H. MANHOLE UTL UTILITY ON DOWN MISC MISCELLANEOUS D.R. DRESSING ROOM MLDG MOLDING V VB VINYL BASE DWG DRAWING M.O. MASONRY OPENING VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE M.R. MOISTURE RESISTANT VERT VERTICAL E EA EACH MS METAL STUD VEST VESTIBULE E.B. EXPANSION BOLT MTD MOUNTED VIF VERIFY IN FIELD EJ EXPANSION JOINT MUL MULLION VWC VINYL WALL COVERING ELEC ELECTRICAL ELEV ELEVATION N N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT W W/ WITH ESC ESCALATOR NO. NUMBER W.B. WALL BUMPER EMER EMERGENCY NOM. NOMINAL WC WATER CLOSET E.P. ELECTRICAL PANEL N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE W/C WHEELCHAIR EQ EQUAL WD WOOD EQUIP EQUIPMENT 0 OC ON CENTER WH WATER HEATER EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER W.I. WROUGHT IRON EXP EXPANSION OPG OPENING W/0 WITHOUT EXIST EXISTING OS. OVERFLOW SCUPPER W.O. WHERE OCCURS EXT EXTERIOR WP WATERPROOF P PREFAB PREFABRICATED WT WEIGHT F F.A. FIRE ALARM PL PLASTIC LAMINATE WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC FD FLOOR BRAIN PLAS PLASTER WWM WELDED WIRE META- FDN FOUNDATION PLBG PLUMBING FIN FINISHED PLWD PLYWOOD Y YD YARD GENERAL NOTES •�/ ALL WORK WILL COMPLY WITH LOCAL, STATE, AND NATIONAL CODES RELATED TO THIS PROJECT. SITE AND BUILDING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FAR HOUSING ACT TINE WRITTEN DIMENSIONS PREVAIL ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS,DO NO SCALE THESE DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS IN THE FIELD. IF ANY DISCREPANCY OCCURS, THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH ANY WORK AFFECTED BY THE DISCREPANCY. CONTRACTORS TO SECURE ALL PERMITS AND REQUIRED INSPECTIONS NECESSARY TO OBTAIN A CERIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY. CONTRACTORS ARE TO PROVIDE ALL TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE WORK, INCLUDING FIRE PROTECTION AS REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION. EACH CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO REVIEW ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO ISSUED BID. CHANGE ORDERS WILL NOT BE APPROVED FOR FAILURE TO DO SO. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED OR OTHERWISE INDICATED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SHALL NOT BE SUBSTITUED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ARCHITECT. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL TRADES REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THIS PROJECT AS REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE THE USE OF THE FACILITY AS PLANNED. 3 LEGAL DESCRIPTION BEGINNING AT THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF LAKE VIEW APARTMENTS, AS SHOWN ON MM OF SURVEY PREPARED FOR BLAND DEVELOPMENT CORP., DATED M Y 14th 1984 BY BLOUNT SIKES BOLICK AND ROCKJTT,INC.:THENCE RUN NORTH 00 01'34" EAST, 73.92 FEET; THENCE RUN SOUTH 89 45803 WEST, 179. FE�jI T 1 NCE RUN NORTH 00%09'30" EAST, 478.70 FEET; THENCE RUN NORTH 89%57'13" EAST, 45.47 FEET; THENCE RUN NORTH 1844'38" EAST, 131.29 FEET TO A POINT ON THE SOUTHERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY OF SE INOLE BOULEVARD;THE14CE RUN SOUTHEASTERLY ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE OF SAID RIGHT-OF-WAY 97.88 FEET, SAD CURVE BEING CONCAVE SOUTHERLY AND HAVING AS IT'S ELEMENTS A RADIUS OF 1547.05 FEET, A DELTA OF 033%437'30", AN ARC LENGTH 97.88 FEET; TO THE POINT OF INTERSECTION OF THE SOUTHERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY OF SEMINOLE BOULEVARD AND THE WEST RIGHT-OF-WAY OF MYRTLE AVENUE; THENCE CONTINUING ALONG SAID SOUTHERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY OF SEMINOLE BOULEVARD RUN SOUTH 73%28'02" EAST, 62.56 FEET; ACROSS MYRTLE AVENUE TO A POINT OF INTERSECTION WITH THE SOUTHERLY RIGHT-OF-WAY OF SEMINOLE BOULEVARD AND THE EAST RIGHT-OF-WAY OF MYRTLE AVENUE; THENCE CONTINUING ALONG SAID RIGHT-OF-WAY OF SEMINOLE BOULEVARD RUN SOUTH %%6'11" EAST, 584.39 FEET; THENCE DEPARTING SAD RIGHT-OF-WAY RUN SOUT 012'16" EAST, 13.18 FEET; THENCE RUN SOUTH 8959'20" WEST, 310.00 FEET; THE CE RUN SOUTH 00%06'52" EAST, 136:FEE o THENCE RUN NORTH 89%58'16" EAST, 62.00 FEET; THENCE RUN SOUTH 00 01'44" EAST,267.28 FEET TO THE NORTH RIGHT-OF-WAY OF FULTON STREET; THENCE RUN SOUTH 89%52'27" WEST ALONG THE NORTH RIGHT-OF-WAY OF FULTON STREET, 359.91 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING. CONTAINING M AREA OF 312,685 SQUARE FEET % (7.18 ACRES). CLIENT: 4 LEGEND 0- T 0 SOMETHING X' -X" A.F.F. T 0 SOMETHING X' -X" A.F.F. ItsF. 5 VICINITY MAP NTS GRID DESIGNATION Q Q BUILDING SECTION A301-2 A301-2 SECTION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER ROOM NUMBER DOOR NUMBER Q WALL SECTION A302-3 L SECTION NUMBER WINDOW TYPE SHEET NUMBER STOREFRONT TYPE A501-6 H SECTION DETAIL WALL TYPE DETAL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER KEY NOTE REVISION NUMBERA8i8 88 DETAL REFERENCE DETAL NUMBER - SHEET NUMBER ELEVATIONS TAGS SPOT ELEVATION TAG Lake Monroe MARKER ELEVATION A2 ELEVATION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER 4 INTERIOR ELEVATION MARKERS SHEET NUMBER ELEVATION NUMBER SUNCOR INVESTMENT INC. 550 N. PALMETTO AVE. SANFORD,FL 32771 (407) 688-7644 FAX (407)688-7920 ARCHITECT: Cuhaci & Peterson Architects, LLC FLORIDACERTIFI CATE #AAC000526 CUHACI & PETERSON. MICHAEL E. LYNCH Q1220 ALDEN RD. ORLANDO, FL. 32803 (407)228-4220 t \ FAX (407) 228-4219 rl�l STRUCTURAL ENGINEER Sanford, DRAWING INDEX: 6 SHEET NO. ARCHITECTURAL A-001THRU A-0010 A101 A201 A202 A301 A302 A401 M02 A601 STRUCTURAL S100 S101 S201 S202 5301 PLUMBING P101 MECHANICAL M101 M102 ELECTRICAL E001 E101 E102 -- BOWEN ENGINEERING CORPORATION 1528 VASSAR STREET EB5026 ORLANDO,FL 32804 BOWEN ENGINEERING CORP FRED BOWEN 1528 VASSAR STREET ORLANDO,FL 32804 (407) 423-7585 FAX (407) 423-4872 TITLE FL MODEL CENTER ISSUE DATE 03/09/04 FLOOR PLANS - _ _ . _-_ I_ - 03/09/04 ELEVATIONS & ROOF PLAN _ — - 03/09/04 ROOF DETAILS ___ - _. ___ 03/09/04 BUILDING SECTION & DETAILS 03/09/04 CANOPY SECTION & DETAILS -_ __- 03/09/04 WALL TYPES III INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 03/09/04 LARGE SCALE PLANS, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS & DETAILS 03/09/04 DOOR & WINDOW SCHEDULES & DETAILS - t 03/09/04 STRUCTURAL NOTES STRUCTURAL PLAN FOUNDATION DETAILS FOUNDATION DETAILS FRAMING DETAILS PLUMBING PLAN, NOTES & DETAILS_ MECHANICAL PLAN MECHANICAL DETAILS - -- ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL LIGHTING / POWER PLAN & PANEL SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL_ LEGEND AND DETAILS CIVIL ENGINEER DESIGN SERVICE GROUP, INC RONALD HENSON 362A SOUTH GRANT STREET LONGWOOD,FL 32750 (407) 331-3773 FAX (407)260-0478 REVISION 1 REVISION 2 REVISION 3 03/09/04-_- 0•:/09/04 03/09/04 - -- - - -IL 1 03/09/04 03/09/04 03/09/04 - ?' 03/09/0 - - L — - 03/09/04 1 - . L _j_ - -- Pro CE 03/09/04 - - - -I OI! - — 03/09/04 03/09/04 - �_ i)LIS REVIEWED -CIT-Y- OF SANFORD REV EWED By: Sanford Fi_ry r�ve ion Div. Date: MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Cuhaci & Peterson Architects, LLC FLORIDA CERTIFICATE #AACD(XIM CUHACI & PETERSON NAWWAF A. AHMAD 1220 ALDEN RD. ORLANDO, FL 32803 (407)228-4220 FAX (407)228-4219 FtEC+ S N� MAR 3 0 2004 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: HORTUS OASIS 1425 BERSHIRE AVENUE WINTERPARK, FLORIDA 32789 (407)622-4886 FAX (407)622-4887 2 3 Il C! , .. d, _�.-.; t. A -SIiiU IIF-SfaN4 9 2b pr�E,FI SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of the Gateway at Riverwalk Model Center. I. Project Location: Gateway at Riverwalk, Sanford, FL 2. Owner: Suncor Investment Inc., 550 North Palmetto Avenue, Sanford, FL 32771 B. The Work consists of a 3,835 sf building including, but not limited to, the complete shell with limited sidewalks and awnings and related mechanical and electrical equipment. Interior buildout to include but not limited to interior partitions, doors, windows and finishes. C. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16 -division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on [AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemen- tal Instructions. 1.2 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will includc supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 14 days, or as indicated after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade dis- counts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Pro- vide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractors Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity rela- tionship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709. D. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installa- tion, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Docu- ment G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. I . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also des- ignates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construc- tion Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substan- tiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. END OF SECTION 01250 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and opera- tion. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own instal- lation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum acces- sibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meet- ings. L Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction or as specifically requested elsewhere in the Construction Documents. I. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activ- ity under consideration. Discuss and resolve all items related to the activity to be performed. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate what- ever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractof s Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meet- ing where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. END OF SECTION 01310 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if pro- cessing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. I. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. C. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submit- tals. E. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submit- tal. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review received from sources other than Contractor or for items that do not require submittals in the Contract Documents. 1. Include Contractor's certification stating that the information submitted has been reviewed and complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. G. Use fix Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in con- nection with construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit 3 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 2 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2. Complete Submittals: Submit complete submittals in accordance with submittal schedule. The architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal until remaining information required in that section or division is provided. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suit- able for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of quali- ties indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these character- istics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 5. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control com- parisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets maybe used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A or similar format suitable to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and loca- tion, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compli- ance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifi- cations required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality con- trol. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indi- cated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Docu- ment requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design profes- sional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifica- tions, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judg- ments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work simi- lar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construc- tion with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be per- formed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. a x v z r� J� WJ U L C U Q� ^U` V/ N CD �� ul C o L' U N v U m y .�w •'Gri O � U COO 0 1 N D Q� MW F"'y�-x444 w, a a a x v z r� J� WJ U L C U Q� CD C in ^, N U FN to }, 1 N D Q� MW rz Y N tO C d co (D co z - m:o W Q O o o' O mLL n- W �^ O o J 2 w ( U a x v z r� J� WJ U L C L Q� U 1 C0 G (D co U) z M O W Q O o' o U li n- a x v z r� J� WJ U L C A-001 1 W Q J o d m Z N W Z -> W d N D V A-001 w I'.11-hilii,4-at L�,1IF-AWA,143,'Bbo AI4 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. I. Where services are indicated as Contractors responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified writ- ten report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturers Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsi- bility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Pro- vide qualified personnel to perforin required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 4. Electric power service. 5. Lighting. 6. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Project identification and temporary signs. 2. Field offices. 3. Temporary stairs. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 5. Fire protection. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: I . Owners construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for elec- tricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary util- ity before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. General; Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures in quantities and loca- tions determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction D. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Drinking -water fountains or Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drink- ing -water units, including paper cup supply in quantities and locations determined by regulation of any authority having jurisdiction E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA -polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets, equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with perfor- mance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, pro- vide trucked -in services. B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construc- tion until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facili- ties. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. . G. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, trans- formers, overload -protected disconnecting means, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribu- tion switchgear. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for con- struction operations and traffic conditions. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. 2. Provide an answering machine on superintendent's telephone. 3. Provide a facsimile machine for site use 4. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access, making them accessible for handicap access where required by the author- ity having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Comple- tion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facili- ties, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indi- cated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 2. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B -B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative -treated wood or steel. 3. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. C. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, water- way, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankrments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trim- ming." E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting struc- turally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform person- nel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. F. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. Store combustible materials in containers in fire - safe locations. 2. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facili- ties, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -expo- sure areas. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interfer- ence with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant mate- rials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. ProductData: For each product indicated, including EPA -Registered Label. B. Product certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Soil Termiticide Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil tenniticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If sub- terranean termite activity or damage is discovered within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMITE CONTROL A. Soil Treatment: EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdic- tion, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering prod- ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. b. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. C. DowElanco. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Apply soil treatment at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA -Registered Label. 1. Mix termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. 2. Apply to produce a continuous horizontal and vertical tenmiticidal barrier or treated zone around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 3. Slabs -on -Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground -supported slab construction, including foot- ings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 4. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 5. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 6. Masonry: Treat voids. 7. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE REFER TO STRUCTURAL END OF SECTION 03300 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES REFER TO STRUCTURAL END OF SECTION 04810 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL REFER TO STRUCTURAL END OF SECTION 05120 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel ladders. 2. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other Work. B. Templates: For anchor bolts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 3. Rolled -Steel Floor Plate: ASTMA 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTMA 36/ A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 4. Rolled -Stainless -Steel Floor Plate: ASTMA 793. 5. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 7. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal channels 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches with flange edges returned toward web and with 9/16 -inch- wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches o.c. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079 -inch nominal thickness. 8. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. 2.2 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT -P-664 and compatible with finish paint systems indi- cated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Connections, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or over- lap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. B. Steel Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2 -by -2 -1/2 -inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart. 2. Bar Rungs: 3/4 -inch- diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. a Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of struc- tural -steel framework as necessary to complete the Work from structural steel of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded anchors at 24 inches o.c. 2. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood a (3 C Q) '~ o w N E) }r � A Co CO / N M (n aM J Z N -0 f-- O O .20 LL 22 c z oa)w VJ CO J V o a 0 L Q) 4 w 4" U Q% (n J Z O t U_ o � w c � oa W V o `J i+ C o U 1-L ~ LL w U) .. 0 4 w J d � C w N 0- Z 0- N o V A-002 E n Z 0 Q 0 U_ U W WJ H U) W W_ V1 finders are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches o.c. a. American Gypsum Co. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 3. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top b. G -P Gypsum Corporation. N U plgtes welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. W C. National Gypsum Company. A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that d. United States Gypsum Co. to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: tv (Ci 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: UJ - PART 3 - EXECUTION I. Dryvit Systems, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. `J U r -L W 2. Senergy Inc.; SKW-MBT Construction Chemicals. o � < C A- 10 n UO -• 3. Sto Corp. om 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G -P Gypsum 3.1 INSTALLATION Z N � 3.1 INSTALLATION I Corp. C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of 2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch and Type X, 5/8 inch thick as indicated on drawings. A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to the following: A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in-place construe- products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be I. Dryvit Systems, Inc., "Outsulation System" Primus DM, Sandpebble Finish. tion. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications D. Extruded -Polystyrene -Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that 2. Senergy; Div. of Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc., "Senerflex QA21", Sahara Finish. accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. and widths with tongue -and -groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. interfere with placement. 3. Sto Corp.; Sto Finish Systems Div., "Classic System", STO BTS- Plus, 1.5 finish. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, 1. Manufacturers: B. Pour granular insulation into cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. masonry, or similar construction. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports 2.2 MATERIALS 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise indicated. Do not a. DiversiFoam Products. after confirming complete coverage. Limit fall of insulation to one story in height, but not exceeding v weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and C. Owens Coming. finish -coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use B. Set bearingand leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing g p g g g g d. Tenneco Building Products. C. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, b EIFS manufacturer for Project. y j ct. members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack with nonshrink, nonmetallic complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to sub - grout. E. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathin y g' g' strate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Substrate: Glass -Mat gypsum sheathing board ASTM C931/C 931 at thickness indicated on drawings from the following manufacturer. F. Oriented -Strand -Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure I sheathing. 1. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or I. G -P Gypsum Corporation, Dens -Glass Gold Sheathing. END OF SECTION 05500 sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in com- pleted installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. C. Water -/Weather -Resistive -Barrier Coating: Formulation and accessories designed for indicated use. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 2. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following D. Primer/Sealer: Substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire-retar- requirements: the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY dant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch thick. a. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more E. Spacers: Furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manu- than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between facturer. PART I - GENERAL 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ends. b. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between F. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: Factory -mixed adhesive recommended by system manufacturer. A. Fasteners: edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 1.1 SUMMARY G. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements, 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humid- 3. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed +'_ support unfaced blankets ASTM C 578 for Type I, and EIIvIA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) A. This Section includes the following: ity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of studs. Insulation Board." 2. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 4. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, 1. Wood framing. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely H. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali -resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility with 2. Wood blocking. indicated, flat washers. in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between other EIFS materials and complying with EIMA 105.01 and ASTM D 578. 3. Wood nailers. insulation and glass. 4. Wood sheathing. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTMA 653/ 5. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire -containment system to prevent insulation from 1. Standard -Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 5. Plywood backing panels. A 653M, G60 coating designation. bowing under pressure from perimeter fire -containment system. 2. Heavy -Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd. 6. Place loose -fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine 3. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. C. Building Paper: Asphalt -saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as 4. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. PART 2 - PRODUCTS felt), unperforated. indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 5. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd. 7. Stuff glass -fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2..`^ 1. Base -Coat Materials: Standard mixture: Manufacturer s standard. 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL PART 3 - EXECUTION J. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: Waterproof mixture. A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber D. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor Standards Committee Board of Review. 3.1 INSTALLATION transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor K. Primer: Factory -mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base -coat surface for application of 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit retarder to cover mg those filled with loose -fiber insula- ll isceaneous voids in insulated substrates, including finish coat. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate [furring,] nailers, tion. L. Finish -Coat Materials: Standard acrylic -based coating. of each piece. blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 -inch nomi- B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and ply- vapor retarders to framin at to end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at la p g p, g Pe F P 1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. nal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. wood. joints. Space fasteners i €;, .. O.C. 2. Seal overlapping Joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor -retarder tape according to vapor- M. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft B. Wood Structural Panels: C- Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor -retarder attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate. with the following:tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. N. Trim Accessories: Manufactured from UV -stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784 and 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended ASTM C 1063. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. by vapor -retarder manufacturer. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS D. Apply building paper horizontally with 2 -inch overlap and 6 -inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galva- 5. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. nized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4 -inch overlap. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that 3.1 INSTALLATION lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be E. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION 07210 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: END OF SECTION 06100 B. Insulation: Adhesively or mechanically attach to substrate. I. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in 1. Expansion Joints: Apply adhesive to insulation by notched -trowel method to coat entire surface connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PB of gypsum sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing, unless system man - 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with ufacturer's written instructions specify using primer -sealer with ribbon -and -dab method. Apply masonry or concrete. adhesive to a height of not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART I - GENERAL (9.6 mm) for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation board before placement. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2. Install top surface of fastener head flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with minimum penetration according to ASTM PS 49 or system manufacturer's written PART I - GENERAL L 1 SUMMARY recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Space fasteners according to system manufactur- 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. This Section includes Class PB exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over CMU or Glass- er's written recommendations. A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with perfor- 1.1 SUMMARY Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board. 3. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally and working upward. mance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire -retardant -treated A. This Section includes the following: 4 . Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another 1. Concealed building insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Loose -fill building insulation. not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door openings. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after 3. Vapor retarders. A. Class PB EIFS: Comply with performance characteristics in EIIv[A's "EIMA Guideline Specification for a. Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from horizontal and 4 inches (100 exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency accord- Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." mm) from vertical joints in sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from horizontal joints in sheath- ing to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood. ].2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Impact Resistance: Standard and Ultra -High. ing. 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Positive and Negative Wind -Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind loads indicated C. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from aesthetic reveals. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response when tested per ASTM E 330. Provide test reports indicating compliance with wind load standard 5. Interlock ends at internal and external comers. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated. characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface -burning of authority having jurisdiction over all substrates indicated. 6. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jmisdic- surfaces without gaps or raised edges between insulation boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER tion. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. (1.6 mm) occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive 1.3 SUBMITTALS or other material. A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading 7. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. complying with details indicated. 8. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities protecting more than 1/32 B. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and any of the following spe- B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, and inch 0.8 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not P 2.1 INSULATING MATERIALS attachments to other work. create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch 1.6 mm). ( cies: 9. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to pro- f . Mixed southern pine; SPIB. A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. C. Samples: For each EIFS and for each color and texture required. duce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not 2. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. B. Mineral -fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass: D. Field quality -control test reports. reduce insulation thickness at features to less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). C. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics I. Faced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with 10. Install foam shapes attached to supporting substrate, where indicated. 11. Interrupt insulation at expansion joints. that would impair finish appearance. foil -scrim -kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on one face. E. Product test reports. 12. Form joints for sealant application. by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between C. Perlite Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 549, Type 11 or Type IV, with a thermal resistance for 4.1- to 7.4- insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to producejoint widths Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. I. Species and glb/cu. ft. insulation of 3.3 to 2.8 deg F x h x sq. ft/Btu at 75 deg F for 1 -inch thickness. For use in masonry 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 2. Species and Grade: Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north), Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or walls 13. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within system and W WPA. A. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer to install manufacturer's system using with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and P g j g g P g 3. Species and Grade: Southern pine, Select Structural No. I grade; SPIB. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Producer trained workers. between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated. 4. Species and Grade: Spruce -pine -fir or Spruce -pine -fir (south), Select Structural No. 1 grade; Members of Perlite Institute Inc. 14. Treat exposed edges of insulation board as follows: NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or W WPA. B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources a. Wrap edges after installing insulation board and before applying field -applied reinforcing approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. mesh. b. Wrap mesh of width required to extend not less than 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) onto substrate 2.5 SHEATHING 2.2 VAPOR RETARDERS C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic behind insulation board, cover insulation board edge, and extend not less than 2-1/2 inches effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. (63 mm) onto insulation board face. A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, ;_. mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of !.. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial C. Wrap edges of insulation board, except those forming substrates of sealant joints, by encap- B. Paper -Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M, with water-resistant material incorporated ' ""4 Completion. with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. d. Wedges of insulation board forming substrates of sealant joints within system or between Wrap into core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges. B. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for system and other work by encapsulating with base coat and reinforcing mesh. sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 15. Treat edges of insulation board at trim accessories by extending base coat, reinforcing mesh, and 1. Manufacturers: E n Z 0 Q 0 U_ U W WJ H U) W W_ V1 U N U F W c a to �' tv (Ci Y N cr) UJ - c 70 z O `o w O FL o `J U r -L W C o � < C A- 10 n UO -• om a J V Z N � E n Z 0 Q 0 U_ U W WJ H U) W W_ V1 L U F W a C0 G (Ci o c UJ z v 0-0 w `V ' O o `J U r -L Q_ N E n Z 0 Q 0 U_ U W WJ H U) W W_ V1 A-003 F W a J � N � < N 10 n UO -• a Z N � W O\f O W Z CL A-003 ir4F-zWdZ4-S[LC41I -JWA4fl2,56 AM finish coat over face leg of accessories. C. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate behind protective coating. at locations indicated; where required by EIFS manufacturer; where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; at floor lines in multilevel wood -framed construction; and where wall height changes. D. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16 -inch dry -coat thickness. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base -coat material if necessary, so reinforcing -mesh color and pattern are not visible. F. Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of standard impact reinforcing mesh. G. Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated, apply in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. H. Finish Coat: Apply maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. L Joint -Sealant Installation: 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." 3.2 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard material warranty (3 -year minimum) from date of Owner Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 07241 SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes built-up asphalt roofing systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system. D. Insulation Compliance Certificate. Submit certificate showing that insulation and R -value complies with RIC/TIMA bulletin 281-1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's prod- ucts. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system approved by roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another test- ing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. Provide minimum total number of plies indicated regardless of whether roof system can meet warranty with a number less than specified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that into the Work include but are not limited to the following: incorporated g ma be Y B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Built-up Asphalt Roofing: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Firestone Building Products Company. C. GAF Materials Corporation. d. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type 1V asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. 2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt -impregnated, glass -fiber felt. B. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Type I or II, polyester -reinforced, APP -modified asphalt sheet; mineral - granule surfaced; and as follows: 1. Granule Color: White 2.4 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type II, III or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system manufac- turer for application. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compat- ible with built-up roofing. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manu- facturer for application C. Cold -Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt -based, one- or two-part, asbes- tos -free, cold -applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing base flashings. D. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provi- sions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufac- turer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION -DOUBLE LAYER A. General: Insulation types specified are for a double layer system and are separated according to deck types and group according to layer. The two layers of selected insulation shall have a combined total heat aged "R"value equal to 17.9 minimum. 1. First Layer - Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major surfaces, 2.0 lbs/cu. Ft. minimum, 2.2 to 2.3 inch thickness.. 2. Second Layer - Contractors Option # 1. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal -coated, '/4 thickness. 3. Second Layer - Contractors Option #2. Glass -Fiber -Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt -coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper, '/4" thickness. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provi- sions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. 2.8 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Mineral -granule -surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip -resisting pads, manufac- tured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: Manufacturer's Standard Size 2. Location: Pad to be located around all mechanical of rooftop equipment, connecting all mechani- cal or rooftop equipment, and paths to the vertical roof access point, or as additionally indicated on plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION. Examine substrate surfaces to receive built-up roofing system and asso- ciated work and conditions roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with roofing until unsatisfactory has been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. The commencement of work on a section of roof will indicate acceptance by the installer and he will be responsible for any corrective work that may be occasioned by his having started over an unsatisfactory surface. 32 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. Fastening to comply with wind load requirements of authority having jurisdiction. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. 1. First Layer. Attach with FM approved screw-type fasteners with plates (minimum one fastener per every two square feet of insulation or per insulation manufacturers recommendation, whichever is more stringent. Lay Units in each layer with long joints continuous and short joints staggered 2. Second Layer. Install over first layer. Embed in full mopping of hot (EVT) Type II, III, or IV asphalt. Overlap all joints to a minimum of 12" each direction. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut boards to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around roof penetrations. Fill joints over 3/8" wide with Perlite insulation. E. Cut and replace broken corner and damaged boards with newly cut insulation pieces. 3.3ROO FING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturers written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." B. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. C. Install four ply sheets (including mineral cap sheet) starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 2. Mineral Cap Sheet must be allowed to relax in an unrolled position prior to installation. D. Deficiencies. Repair all membrane deficiencies including voids, bridging, fishmouths, cuts and tears in all affected plies. E. Valleys and Waterways: Apply an extra roofing ply underneath of sufficient width to extend a minimum of eight inches up each side of valley or waterway. F. Cants: Terminate roofing plies 2" above all cant strips. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetra- tions through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instruc- tions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing. E. Primer. Prime masonry and concrete walls to receive base flashings with asphalt primer at a rate of gallon per 100 square feet. F. Fibrated Aluminum Coating. Cover completed base flashing and wall surface covering system with alu- minum coating. Apply at a rate of I gallon per 100 square feet. Extend aluminum coating from inside to edge of wall down over base flashing. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cap Sheet Strips: Install cap sheet strips, approximately 36 inches wide and in lengths not exceeding 10 feet, leaving a space of 6 inches between strips. Adhere in hot roofing asphalt. END OF SECTION 07511 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1- GENERAL LI SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Manufactured reglets. 2. Formed roof drainage system. 3. Formed low -slope roof flashing and trim. 4. Formed steep -slope roof flashing and trim. 5. Formed wall flashing and trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim. C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering prod- ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers speci- fied. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and struc- tural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color: Match Architect's description. 2. Clear Anodic Finish: Class 11, AA -M 12C22A31, complying with AAMA 611. 3. Color Anodic Finish: Class II, AA-M12C22A34, complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: Bone White. B. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet (Galvalume Plus): ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coat- ing designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM 150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating both sides. 1. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating: a. Factory Prime Coating: Factory -applied, baked -on epoxy primer coat. b. High-Perfomance Organic Finish: Two coat therm cured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified for below: 1) Humidity and Salt Spray Resistance: 1000 hours. 2) Color: Match Architect's description C. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper -bearing lead sheet. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installa- tion. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) minimum and not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) long, barbed with large head. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory - applied coating. 3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound. H. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.4 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and - welded corners and junctions, 1. Manufacturers: a. Cheney Flashing Company, Inc. b. Fry Reglet Corporation. C. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams forAluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compat- ible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hang- ers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. I. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.024 thick. B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4 -inch - wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and built-in overflows. 1. Fabricate conductor heads from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch long, but not exceed- ing 10 -foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6 -inch- wide joint cover plates. 1. Fabricate from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm-) long, but not exceeding 10 -foot- (3-m-) long, sec- tions. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and[ drill elongated holes for fasteners on] interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum. 0.040 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch > thick. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material as indicated on drawings: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. U) Z 0 Q U y� / // / U � 'o C Y LLL U o a) N U aD a) In a i --r C0 G �m v >cc ccn N � a r`' to Z a) to wrn L- o o o' OLr .00 - cu a N , c: Qt c z - O � Z rr��� vJ J V U) Z 0 Q U y� / // / L � 'o Q% Y LLL U t a) U a) a C0 G o c Z a) wrn -mo co o o o' V U LL a N U) Z 0 Q U y� / // / U Z � 'o � Y LLL U A-004 t a N , < N - W a 6 a Z N W Ol Z o � W 3 V � A-004 G. Fastener§ Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Copper: Use copper or stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold down- spouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. C. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge. 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMAC- NA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently water- tight. B. Roof Edge Flashing and Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommenda- tions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 and the authority having jurisdiction. C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. D. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roof- ing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Tum lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. END OF SECTION 07620 SECTION 07720 - ROOF PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Roof curbs. 2. Roof hatches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each exposed finish upon request of architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for o fabrication of units includingflanges ges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M with Class AZ -50 coating, structural quality, Grade 40 (Grade 275), or as required for strength. B. Insulation: Manufacturers standard rigid or semirigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Provide nonremovable fastener heads. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and con- taining no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coating. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. H. Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.2 ROOF CURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Metallic Products Corporation. 3. Vent Products Co., Inc. C. General: Units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Coordinate dimensions with equipment to be supported. I. Provide preservative -treated wood nailers at tops of units and formed flange at perimeter bottom for mounting to roof. 2. Fabricate units to minimum height of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot, fabricate support units with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. D. Roof Curbs: 1. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.0747 -inch -thick, structural -quality, hot -dip galvanized or aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet; factory primed and prepared for painting with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints. 2. Fabrication: Unless otherwise indicated or required for strength, fabricate units from minimum 0.063 -inch -thick, sheet aluminum with welded corner joints. 3. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation where indicated. 4. Cants: Formed cants and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to ensure that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural sub- strates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details in NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated, C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separa- tion. D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form seal. E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof over- lap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. F. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coat- ings. END OF SECTION 07720 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Exteriorjoints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 5. Exterior joints in sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to deter- mine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, opti- mum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. B. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates using test method indicated in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Mockups: s: Before installing Joint sealants aPP1 elastomeric m rt c sealani s to demonstrate strafe ae stheficeffects and qualities of materials and execution. I. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not meet requirements specified in this Section or fail in adhesion within specified warranty period two years from date of Final Acceptance, PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated on drawings or to match adjacent finishes. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: (Gutters & Coping Sealant) 1. Products: a. Dow Corning; 795. b. GE Silicone, SilPruf. C. Tremco Spectrem 2 B. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: L For vertical masonry control joints, provide the following: a. Products: 1) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. 2) Tremco; Vulkem 116, 3) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - la. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class: 25. 2. Exposure: Use T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Substrates: Uses M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. C. Urethane Sealant: 1. Concrete paving joints, horizontal traffic surfaces. a. Products: 1) Bostik, "Chem -Calk 950". 2) Sonneborn,"SL-I". 3) Tremco, Vulkem 45 b. Type and Grade S (singe component) and NS (nonsag). C. Class 25 d. Exposure: T (traffic). C. Substrate: O 2.3 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and otherjoint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by seal- ant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type: C (closed -cell material with a surface skin). C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and seal- ant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Contractor performing work must be one the Sealant Manufacturer's Approved Applicators. B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. I. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing opti- mum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm sub- strates, or leave residues could interfere with adhesion of joint sealants. 5. All surfaces to be caulked shall be clean and dry. C. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. E. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as appli- cable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. F. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and at position required to produce opti- mum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. G. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back ofjoints. H. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 1. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 2. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths that allow optimum sealant movement capa- bility. 3. All deep cracks shall be filled to within 1/2 inch of the surface with an appropriate back-up mate- rial and caulked with a caulking gun. Caulking beads shall be smooth and straight. 4. Caulk around all door and storefront openings and where noted on the drawings. I. Masonry control joints shall be caulked with a high-quality paintable urethane caulk. Control depth of caulk at 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch with a continuous closed -cell rod. J. Tooling ofNonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhe- sion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless other- wise indicated. K.1 C can excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION 07920 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid and hollow core doors as follows: I. Doors with wood -veneer faces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construc- tion details; location and extent of hardware blocking; fire ratings; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: For each face material and finish upon request of the Architect. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with NW WDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Ampco Products, Inc. 2. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 3, Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Doors for Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces for Interior Doors: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option. B. Hollow -Core Doors: 1. Core: Institutional hollow core. 2. Finish: Prefinished Factory 3. Frame: Prehung. C. Blocking: For hollow -core doors, provide blocking as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. D. Provide doors with glued -block 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indi- cated. END OF SECTION 08211 SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL I.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior entrance systems. 2. Exterior storefront systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural move- ments indicated without failure when supporting full dead loads and without framing members transfer- ring stresses to glazing. B. Structural -Silicone -Sealant Joints: Less than 20 -psi tensile and shear stress in joints. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Load: 110 MPH. 2. Seismic Load: 0. D. Structural Performance: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding loads indicated. 1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: When carrying full dead load, not to exceed amount that reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. E. Structural Testing: ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures for duration required by design wind velocity without system evidencing material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span. F. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static -air -pressure difference f e diff ence 0 1.571 f sq b/ .ft.. G. Water Penetration: No water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind -load design pressure but not less than 6.24 IbUsq. ft.. H. Temperature Change (Range): Accommodate 120 deg F ambient and 180 deg F material surfaces. L Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Not less than 45 per AAMA 1503.1. J. Average Thermal Conductance (U -Value): Not more than 0.63 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F per AAMA 1503.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. I . Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required upon request of Architect. D. Product test reports indicating compliance with applicable wind load provisions required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sys- tems that fail in materials and workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Fail- ure includes, but is not limited to the following: I. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. U) Z 0 Q _U LL U W LL1J LL U) W W U C ^U, 4/ N o o n, 0 U E v o Cay � 1�-� • ca 8 ten% csi O Y N � C co Z N� .e a m io a A z u U) Z 0 Q _U LL U W LL1J LL U) W W U C 4-a o n, N E (n U Q� ca 0 Y N C co Z N� W m io W z 00 C U cra7 W 'Mv � 102 w�n o M w ''/^� c J 2 V U) Z 0 Q _U LL U W LL1J LL U) W W L Q� U Q) 0 C0 G Z N� W 'v W z o C (D cra7 z 'Mv � 6 o� w�n o V U ti a U) Z 0 Q _U LL U W LL1J LL U) W W A-005 0 0 Z N� W rn W z a W 6 W A-005 0 0 Z N� W rn z 6 W A-005 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for systems is based on Kawneer Tri -Fab 450. Subject to compli- ance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. CMI Architectural Products, Inc. 3. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. 4. EFCO Corporation. 5. Kawneer. 6, Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 7. Tubelite Inc. 8. United States Aluminum. 9. Vistawall Architectural Products. IQ YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions. B. Finish: Clear Anodic Finish. Class I, AAMA 607.1. C. Glazing: Specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure -glazing system of black resilient glazing gaskets with sealed corners, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. E. Structural -Sealant -Glazing System: 1. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended in writing by manufacturer, and compatible with sealant. 2. Structural Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 1184, recommended in writing by sealant and system manu- facturers for application indicated, and compatible with system components with which it comes in contact. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. b. Tensile Strength: 100 psi minimum. C. Modulus of Elasticity: Allows maximum movement of 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by system design. 3. Secondary Sealant (Weatherseal): ASTM C 920, compatible with structural silicone sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact, and accommodates 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at the time of application when tested according to ASTM C 719. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. F. Gaskets, Sealants, and Joint Fillers: 1. For joints within training system, as recommended in writing by manufacturer for joint type indi- cated. 2. For joints at perimeter of systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold -applied asphalt mastic paint for- mulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: 1 -3/4 -inch -thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125 -inch -thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods, and with snap -on extruded -aluminum glazing stops and Preformed gaskets. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. Hardware: As specified in Division 8 door hardware Section. B. Fasteners, Flashings, and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion -resistant, nonstain- ing, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. B. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Doors and Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed hardware before finishing components. D. Factory assemble framing and components to greatest extent Possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until structural sealant is cured. 2. Install secondary sealant (weatherseal) to produce weatherproof joints. 3. Remove excess sealant before sealant has cured. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following toler- ances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch For surfaces meeting at comers, limit offset to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. END OF SECTION 08410 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications: 1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Storefront framing. B. See Division 8 "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Work under this specification includes the furnishing of all labor, material and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the providing and installing of all glazing in sash and doors shown on the draw- ings. B. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the fol- lowing: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. C. Glass Design: Glass thickness indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thick- ness by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thickness indicated, but not less than thickness and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thickness: Select minimum glass thickness to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 110 MPH, but not less than wind loads applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Sec- tion 6.0 "Wind Loads." C. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than '14 inch tempered. C. Thickness of Tinted and Heat -Absorbing Glass: "Insulated", '/< inch tempered inside and outside with % inch airspace. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C), in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. Center -of -Glass U -Values: National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. in x K). 3. Center -of -Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 4. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) square, for tinted glass product indicated upon request of architect. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to deter- mine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, opti- mum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. PART2_ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. a. ASA Industries, Inc. b. Libby -Owens Ford -Glass Company C. Mississippi Glass Company d. Pittsburg Plate Glass Company 2. Trade names herein denote grade, type and quality.of material required. 2.2 GLASS MATERIALS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3 1. Fabrication Process: At manufacturer's option. 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, Gated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materi- als they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: As indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, includ- ing those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class and uses. I. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Glaz- ing Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASMT C 920 for uses indicated. C. Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.4 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid seal- ant. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of type and material indicated below and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene or EPDM dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846. 2. Silicone dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Neoprene, EPDM or Silicone soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type B, black. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire - resistance rating. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance require- ments. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publica- tions. 1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. 4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances. B. Protection: 1. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. D. At completion this contractor shall wash and polish all glazing and clean adjacent surfaces soiled by his work. END OF SECTION 08800 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 3. Non -load-bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work upon request of Architect. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: o ucts: Sub]ect to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. I . Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements. a. Protective Coating: 1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized. 2) Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Tie Wire: ASTMA 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch -diameter wire. a. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construc- tion as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. 4. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2 -inch -wide flange, and in depth indicated. 5. Furring Channels (Furring Members): a. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. b. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 1. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 630 System. C. USG Interiors, Inc., Drywall Suspension System. D. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. 2. Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch -deep flanges. 3. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch oras indicated. 4. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch -wide flange, and in depth indicated. a. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068 -inch -thick, galvanized steel. 5. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Tie Wire: ASTMA 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm- ) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch -diameter wire. 6. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. L Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flex- ible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness, 1/4 inch thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular - type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Apply on ceiling surfaces. E. Exterior Gypsum Panels for Ceilings and Soffits: 1. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with core type and in thickness indicated. a. Product: G -P Gypsum Corp; Dens -Glass Gold. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 1. Comerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Products: a. Fry Reglet Corp.; As indicated by designation on Drawings. b. Gordon, Inc.. C. MM Systems Corporation; As indicated by designation on Drawings. d. Pittcon Industries; As indicated by designation on Drawings. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound d for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coot use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim accessories, and fasteners, use setting -type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound]. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finishes, use [setting -type, sandable topping compound] [drying -type, all-purpose compound]. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping com- pounds. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable top- ping compounds. 2. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufactur- er's written recommendations. I. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 ion) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION U) Z 0 Q U_ LL w w J H a - (3 C v/ N o h o U U U v W u o .0 cn CD ca v ` / U� U � a a a v 4 U) Z 0 Q U_ LL w w J H a - (3 C 4_0 o N U E' W AE (n cn CD ca v ` / (a M � a �j a m'10 L ) .00 U Eo W �a ICU c2 z - +C; 0 J V a) J V U) Z 0 Q U_ LL w w J H a - L a) 'i j U E' W C� G �j a O ) fm ICU 0-00 Wfn w `o J V U ti M CL U) Z 0 Q U_ LL w w J H a - A-006 'i j E' W a J i o a N � Z a o a M W J V o Ln Ln O V A-006 f E,114G - 203624 - 5FEC7.1 W - 8f22104 82556 AM A. General' Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Suspend@d Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplay- ing, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit. 4. Screw furring to wood framing. 5. Wire -tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indi- cated. 6. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt - cut to fit into wall track. C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to pro- vide support for gypsum board. 3. Frame door openings to comply with GA -600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof struc- ture above. 4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. I. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 2. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent pos- sible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 3. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indi- cated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 4. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. B. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Apply exterior gypsum panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. I. Fasten with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 FINISHING A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finishing Gypsmn Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefi11 open joints and damaged surface areas. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 3. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 4. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instruc- tions. C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: L Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fas- teners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 09260 SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings. 12 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each acoustical tile, for each concealed suspension system member and for each color and texture required. C. Product test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory. B. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 1. ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings --Seismic Zones 0-2." 3. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 22 GENERAL A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing perASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc -coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coat- ing, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- diameter wire. E. Seismic struts and seismic clips. F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. General: Acoustical tiles shall be 24" x 24" x 5/8" matte finish mineral fiber ceiling boards and shall con- form to Federal Specification SS -S -118a, Class 25. Light reflectance shall be no less than 75% and have NRC minimum range of .50 -.60. B. Products: L Annstrong "Cortega". 2. Celotex `Baroque" 3. U.S.G. "Omni Fissured" 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. General: The ceiling suspension system shall be an exposed grid system with exposed flanges having a factory applied white enamel finish with roll formed capped edges. 1. Main Runner: DX -24 2. Cross Tees: DX -424 3. Wall Angle: M6S B. Products: 1. Donn Products, Inc., Westlake, OH. 2. Acoustical Tile Supplier Standard Grid System. C. Ceiling Suspension System: Direct hung; ASTM C 635, intermediate -duty structural classification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders unless depicted on drawings. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building s structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. L Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. D. Install edge moldings and trim at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile -to -tile joints are closed by double lap of material. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf -type, spring -steel spac- ers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c. END OF SECTION 09512 SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop prim- ing and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equip- ment that do not have a factory -applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components: a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. b. Light fixtures. C. Acoustical tile ceilings. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code -required labels or equipment name, identifica- tion, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel," "Metal Stairs," and "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop prim- ing structural and ferrous steel. 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for field finished wood doors. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board. 4. Division 9 Section "Exterior Architectural Coatings" for special exterior coating. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. I. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 -degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60 - degree meter. 3. Semi gloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60 -degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60 -degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual condi- tions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. I. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit Three Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Painted Wood: 8 -inch- (200 -mm-) square Samples for each color and material on hard- board. b. Stained or Natural Wood: 6 -by -10 -inch (150 -by -250 -mm) Samples of natural- or stained - wood finish on representative specie(s) of wood to be used. C. Ferrous Metal: 4 -inch- (100 -mm-) square Samples of flat metal 8 -inch- (200 -mm-) long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. C. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Contractor will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Small Areas and Items: Contractor will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Contractor will use the room or surface to evaluate coating sys- tems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign mate- rials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at tem- peratures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying peri- ods. 1.8 EXTRAMATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing con- tents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below: a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: [1 gal. (3.8 L)] of each color applied. b. Exterior, Low -Luster Acrylic Finish: 11 gal. (3.8 L)] of each color applied. C. Exterior, Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: 11 gal. (3.8 L)] of each color applied. d. Exterior, Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: [1 gal. (3.8 L)1 of each color applied. e. Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 12 gal. (7.5 L)] of each color applied. f. Interior, Low -Luster Acrylic Finish: [2 gal. (7.5 L)] of each color applied. g. Interior, Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: [2 gal. (7.5 L)] of each color applied. h. Interior, Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: [2 gal. (7.5 L)] of each color required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: I . Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado). 3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 4. Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (Kelly -Moore). 5. M. A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (M. A. B. Paint). 6. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturers proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory -formulated high-performance latex block fillers. I . Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 8.1 mils (0.206 mm). 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Latex Block Filler No. M88: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils (0.206 mm). 3. Coronado; 946-11 Super Kote 5000 Commercial Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 8.4 mils (0.214 mm). 4. ICI Dulux Paints; Bloxfil 4000-1000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils (0.178 to 0.368 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 521 Fill and Prime Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0 mils (0.254 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Block Kote No. 1000 Acrylic Latex Block Filler 064-145: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 12.0 mils (0.305 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils (0.152 to 0.318 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 8.0 mils (0.203 mm). 2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory -formulated alkyd- or alkali -resistant acrylic -latex primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore, Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 2. Coronado; 8-11 Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 250 Color Shield Exterior Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Lok Tile Latex Masonry Primer 056-125: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 nun). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer 1342W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). B. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory -formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). a U) Z 0 U_ LJ_ LUL] J ti U) w I, v Z F r� J'I U U U N o 0 U� N U aD i w p U C0 G U CD A a U) Z 0 U_ LJ_ LUL] J ti U) w I, v Z F r� J'I U U 'C o a) N U aD i a) C0 G CD a o CUN w C co m Z - Ta 'o i- O O C 0 LL o_ UE3 C:m o C � tV �� U) 0 2 w V a U) Z 0 U_ LJ_ LUL] J ti U) w I, v Z F r� J'I U L a) U i a) C0 G 'v a o c w (Dm) Z �n oM C V U ti o_ a U) Z 0 U_ LJ_ LUL] J ti U) w I, v Z F r� J'I U A-007 i w a J C\ C5 ° Z N laJ O� Z C W d N O V A-007 2. Coronado; 8-11 Supreme Acrylic Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints, 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 255 Stain --Lock II Stain Resistant Acrylic Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Latex Primer Coat 056-958: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). C. Exterior Wood Primer for Alkyd Enamels: Factory -formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 2. Coronado; 5-11 Supreme Collection Oil House Paint Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2110-1200 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Alkyd Prime coat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 220 Weather Shield Exterior Alkyd Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils (0.058 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Latex Primer Coat 056-958: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.039 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 Percent Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W42: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). D. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Anti -Corrosive Primer 073-132: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6B50WZ 1: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). E. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Latex Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterbome Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 min). 4. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 6. Kelly -Moore; 5725 DTM-Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 7. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Hydro -Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073-189: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 8. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 9. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 10. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory -formulated alkali -resistant acrylic -latex interior primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Under coater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kole 5000 Latex Primer -Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3030-1200 Bond -Prep Interior/Exterior Waterbome Pigmented Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Vinyl Primer 037-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory -formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Under coater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kole 5000 Latex Primer -Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 4. ICI Dulux Paints; 1030-1200 Ultra -Hide PVA Interior Primer Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Vinyl Primer 037-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic -Enamel and Semi gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finishes: Factory -formulated alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2. Coronado; 78-11 Super Kole 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 min). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3210-1200 Ultra -Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 975 Acry Plex Interior Latex Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Latex Undercoat 037-154: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Under coater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 min). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer B49W200 Series: Applied at a dry fihn thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer 1328W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). D. Interior Wood Primer for Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finishes: Factory -formulated alkyd- or acrylic -latex - based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2. Coronado; 78-11 Super Kole 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1120-1200 Ultra -Hide Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Undercoat: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 985 Flo -Cote Alkyd Enamel Under coater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.064 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Latex Under coater 037-154: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-6 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Enamel Under coater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Wall and Wood Primer B49W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). E. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated quick -drying rust -inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer. I . Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 22 mils (0.056 mm). 4. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Anti -Corrosive Primer 073-132: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6B50WZI: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). F. Interior Zinc -Coated Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer. I. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Hydro -Prime II Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Primer 073-189: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 8. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS B50WZ30: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated flat acrylic -emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 8 -Line Supreme Acrylic Latex Flat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2200-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1205 Color Shield Exterior Flat Acrylic House Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Latex House Paint 409 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). B. Exterior Low -Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated low -sheen (eggshell) acrylic -latex paint for exte- rior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 2. Coronado; 408 -Line Supreme Acrylic Satin Exterior: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 inn). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1245 Acry-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Latex Eggshell 405 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin --Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-400 Series Pitt -Tech One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). C. Exterior Semi gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semi gloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 2. Coronado; 12 -Line Supreme Acrylic Semi -Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Finish: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 min). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Acrylic Latex Trim Enamel 024 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). D. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Wood: Factory -formulated full -gloss waterbome acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 414 Super Kole 5000 Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 nun). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/ExteriorAcrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Finish 043 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 Line Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterbome High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W 100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior High Gloss Latex Enamel A85 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mil (0.031 mm E. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory -formulated full -gloss water- borne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28: Applied at a dry thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils 0.036 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic (DTM) Maintenance Finish 043 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Water- borne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils W.076 nim). 7. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W 100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (C:. 6l mm). F. Exterior Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory -formulated full -gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kole 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1700 Kel-Guard Gloss Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Enamel: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rust-O-Lastic Finish Coating 074 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss -Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated flat acrylic -emulsion latex paint for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of notless than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 28 Line Super Kole 5000 Latex Flat Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall & Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Kellv-Moore; 450 Pro -Wall Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Latex Flat 402 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). B. Interior Flat Latex -Emulsion Size: Factory -formulated flat latex -based interior paint. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 28 Line Super Kole 5000 Vinyl Latex Flat Wall: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall & Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 450 Pro -Wall Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Latex Flat 402 Line: Applied at a dry filen thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). C. Interior Low -Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Coronado; 30 -Line Super Kole 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1610 Sat -N - Sheen Interior Latex Low Sheen Wall and Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 1686 Dura-Poxy Eggshell Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Latex Satin Eggshell Enamel 405 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils (0.032 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg -Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). D. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior appli- cation. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 32 -Line Super Kole 5000 Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1649 Acrylic -Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 5. Kelly -Moore; 1685 Dura-Poxy Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Latex Semi -Gloss 410 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel B31 W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). E. Interior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated full -gloss acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 414 Line Super Kole 5000 Acrylic High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1680 Dura-Poxy Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Architectural High Gloss Latex Enamel 022-127 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 7. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-374 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 8. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). F. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel. Factory -formulated semi gloss alkyd enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 271: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 2. Coronado, 27 -Line Super Kole 5000 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. 1C1 Dulux Paints; 1516-XXXX Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi -Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1630--Kel-Cote Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kole Semi -Gloss 403 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-1110 Series SpeedHide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi -Gloss Oil: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). G. Interior Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Gypsum Board: Factory -formulated full -gloss alkyd interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22: Applied at a dry filen thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kole 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1700 Kel-Guard Gloss Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Enamel: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Architectural Bright White Enamel 026-127 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss -Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35 W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 min). H. Interior Full -Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Wood and Metal Surfaces: Factory -formulated full -gloss alkyd interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22: Applied at a dry fihn thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kole 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 4. Kelly -Moore; 1630--Kel-Cote Interior Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Architectural Bright White Enamel 026-127 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils (0.048 mm). 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss -Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 7. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35 W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 2.8 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open -Grain Wood Filler: Factory -formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. UUQ Q 2. Coronado; none required. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; none required. U 4. Kelly -Moore; none required. 5. M. A. B. Paint; Paste Wood Filler. 0 6. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 4 i 7. Sherwin-Williams; Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. 8. Sherwin-Williams; none recommended. B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory -formulated alkyd -based penetrating wood stain for interior application co applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. CU 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Coronado; 3601 -Line Quick -Seal Alkyd Stain. L_O 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1700 -XXX WoodPride Interior Solventbome Wood Finishing Stain. Q� 4. Kelly -Moore; McCloskey Stain. � 5. M. A. B. Paint; Wood Stain 062 Line. rcc� 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi -Transparent Oil Stain. V 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series. C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory -formulated fast -drying alkyd -based clear wood sealer applied at spreading J V rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413. 2. Coronado; 81-10 Dual Seal. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish, 4. Kelly -Moore; 2164 E Z Sand Alkyd Q. D. Sealer. 5. M. A. B. Paint; Minit Dri Sanding Sealer 037-005 Line. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick -Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and Finish. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. D. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane -Based Clear Satin Varnish: Factory -formulated alkyd- or polyurethane - based clear varnish. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre No. 435. 2. Coronado; 67-100 Polyurethane Liquid Plastic Satin Varnish. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 4. Kelly -Moore; 2050 Kel--Aqua Stain Base. 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Water Based Satin Polyurethane. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear, 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series, E. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Factory -formulated clear satin acrylic -based polyurethane var- nish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin. 2. Coronado; 70-100 Aqua -Plastic Urethane Clear Satin. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1802-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Satin Varnish. 0 U) Z 0 Q _U LL U LUJ w U) U Z © wo l J V Z� L U V/^U, N v1 o CD UUQ Q N s U .0 O 0 r� U P -I ice, 4 i 0 U) Z 0 Q _U LL U LUJ w U) U Z © wo l J V Z� L U _ 4_0�-0 N CD U 70 M co v C0 G to co CU ca ca a L_O 0 w Q� ca lL � o-0 w rcc� o C) V 0 c w � 2 J V 0 U) Z 0 Q _U LL U LUJ w U) U Z © wo l J V Z� L L _ 4_0�-0 U 70 C0 G CU o o c w N to o-0 rcc� C) V U IL a 0 U) Z 0 Q _U LL U LUJ w U) U Z © wo l J V Z� L =/: €b 5 S a S « e r 5 V V w z N w rn z ® \O U N Q m W J ' o a w N Q LC7 tin- O V =/: KEVIN I - 2W424 SV W4 I IF - lr2M4 8 2656 AM 4. Kelly -Moore; 2097 Kel-Thane II Clear Acrylic Urethane --Satin. U Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or fumi- a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 5. Ni. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Water Based Satin Polyurethane 088-900s. a--+ ture with prime coat only. W b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane, a) 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers U 2. Low-LusterAcrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin, A68 Series. E or grilles. 3. Semi gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. (n 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. G a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. E Interior Waterbome Clear Gloss Varnish: Factory -formulated clear gloss acrylic -based polyurethane var- 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. nish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss acrylic enamel. tl co 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. _1 - 3. Semi gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes High Gloss No. 428. L O O 4. Semi gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. LL 2. Coronado; 70-10 Aqua -Plastic Urethane Clear Gloss. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared b. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. b. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1808-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Gloss Varnish. C: for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. z a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss acrylic enamel. 4. Kell Moore; 2096 Kel-Thane 11 Clear Acrylic Urethane --Gloss. Y �/ o a) W b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss alkyd enamel. 4. Semi gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 5. M. A. B. Paint; Rich Lux Water Based Gloss Polyurethane 088-899 Line. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry: 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-45 Rez Full -Gloss Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. 7. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Gloss, A68 Series. sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instruc- 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss alkyd enamel. tions, sand between applications. M 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 5. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION CD 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. Ce until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that D a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. V edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to 2. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss acrylic enamel. 3.1 EXAMINATION that of flat surfaces. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel stick under moderate thumb Y a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 6. Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. paint p b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. paint application. pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhe- a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and sur- Sion. 3. Semi gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces. faces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. G. All -Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a to manufacturer's written instructions. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss acrylic enamel. covering: particular area. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for 4. Semi gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a filled surface. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of surface or item being painted. the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materi- 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufac- a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex -emulsion size. als to ensure use of compatible primers. turer for material and texture required. b. Finish Coat: Interior semi gloss alkyd enamel. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates for material and texture required. C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 3.8 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL -FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE primed by others. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system 3.2 PREPARATION as recommended by manufacturer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 1. Alkyd -Based Stain Satin -Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd -based clear satin varnish over b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because in occupied spaces. 2. Low-LusterAcrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area reinstall items removed using workers F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. Q. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane -based clear satin varnish. skilled in the trades involved. 1. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 2. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. 3. Semi gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 2. Waterborne Stain Satin -Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over a B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could sealer coat and waterborne interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss acrylic enamel. a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not 1. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have afactory-primed finish for field painting. b. Stain Coat: lnterior wood stain. fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 4. Semi glossAlkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with d. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturers written pores filled. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss alkyd enamel. 3. Waterborne Stain Full -Gloss Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear full -gloss var- 1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to nish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe filler before applying stain. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recent 5. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry and cement plaster surfaces to primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss acrylic enamel. C. Sealer Coat Clear sanding sealer. methods of surface preparation. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque sur- d. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish. face of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 6. Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. B. Natural -Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork: b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this con- K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss alkyd enamel for gypsum board and plaster. 1. Alkyd -Based Satin-Vamish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd -based clear satin varnish over a sand- dition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or ing sealer. Provide wood filler on open -grain wood before applying first varnish coat. in manufacturer's written instructions. other surface imperfections. D. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, l . Provide satin finish for final coats. I. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. C. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane -based clear satin varnish. L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Rolland redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of roll- a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic -enamel and semi gloss alkyd -enamel finishes. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and ing, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. 2. Waterborne Satin -Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over a sanding sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint 2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood under coater. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other work not complying with requirements. a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. recommended knot sealer before applying rimer. After priming, fill holes and im erfec- P P g P a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic -enamel and semi gloss alkyd -enamel finishes. b. oat: ear sanding sealer. tions in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss acrylic enamel. C. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, 3.4 CLEANING undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. 3. Semi gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 3. Waterbome Full -Gloss Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear full -gloss varnish over C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materi- a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic -enamel and semi gloss alkyd -enamel finishes. a sealer coat. Wipe filler before applying stain. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall con- als from Project site. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss alkyd enamel. stmction occurs on backside. a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by 4. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood primer. b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. sealer immediately on delivery. washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. C. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic -enamel and semi gloss alkyd -enamel finishes. oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning 3.5 PROTECTION b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss acrylic enamel. END OF SECTION 09912 methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage 5. Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood rimer. Y P a Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for full -gloss alkyd -enamel finishes. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces. temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. SECTION 09963 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS priming. E. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, 1. After work other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. I. Flat Ac lic Finish: Two finish coats over a rimer. rY P PART I - GENERAL clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as h Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl. the shop coat. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer, 1.1 SUMMARY b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 2. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. A. This section includes requirements for the proper design, use and installation of Exterior Archi- from coil stock by mechanical methods. A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry: Refer to Section 09963, "Exterior Architectural Coatings" for finish tectural Coatings. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. systems over exterior concrete, and concrete unit masonry substrates: a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. B. Section Includes: I. Maintain containers used in mixingand applying aint in a clean condition, free of foreign materi- P g B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required 3. Semi gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Exterior Architectural Coatings on shop -primed items. als and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over arust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. C. Related Sections: application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi loss ac tic enamel. g acrylic material before using. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi gloss acrylic enamel. 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 4. Semigloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. C. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc -coated metal surfaces: 1.2 REFERENCES E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats 1. Semi gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -meta] primer. of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient b. Finish Coats: Interior semi gloss alkyd enamel. A. ASTM B117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 606 1) Test Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Test - differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. ing. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 5. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. B. ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement. 3.3 APPLICATION a. Primer. Interior ferrous -metal primer. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss acrylic enamel. C. ASTM C297 Test Method for Tensile Strength of Flat Sandwich Constructions in Flatwise Plane. A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. A. Concrete and MasonryOther Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following paint systems over ( mY) g P Y 6. Full -Gloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. D. ASTM D968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of interior concrete and brick masonry substrates: Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces. E. ASTM D3273 Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on Surfaces. formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. F. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc -coated metal surfaces: F. ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. G. ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 2. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. S. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. a Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. Z 0 Q U_ LL U W LUJ U a) a--+ W C a) N U az E (n G (Cf J Y N C: tl co � _1 - m � W L O O o 0 LL a c a) ISL �d C: c z ICU^ Z �/ o a) W �/ ' �- 2 U Z 0 Q U_ LL U W LUJ L a) W C a) U G (Cf J o c ca _1 - o 5 W rrenn w `o o V U tT a Z 0 Q U_ LL U W LUJ A-009 W J a o � ["-C- Om M W 3 U CD Ce D V A-009 _ , A"Ik .._a"I9 eo "I.qd H. AS-fM G155 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Recommended Practice for Operating Expkosure Apparatus (Carbon -Arc Type) With and Without Water, for Exposure of Nonmetallic Mawrials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor: The contractor that applies materials to the substrate. B. Lamina: The layer consisting of the reinforced base coat and finish materials. C. Finish: An acrylic based coating, available in a variety of textures and colors, which is applied to the prepared wall surface. D. Reinforced Base Coat: The layer consisting of fiberglass reinforcing mesh fully embedded in the base coat material applied to the outside surface of the substrate. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Glass fiber mesh used to reinforce the base coat. F. Substrate: The material to which the exterior architectural coatings are applied. 1.4 DESCRIPTION A. General: Exterior Architectural Coatings consist of base coat and reinforcing mesh (where speci- fied), acrylic primer and finish, applied to various substrates. B. Design Requirements: L Acceptable surfaces for the Exterior Architectural Coatings include: a. Poured and precast concrete. b. Brick and masonry units. C. Exterior cement and calcium silicate boards (without joints). 2. Projecting surfaces shall have a minimum slope of 6:12 and maximum length of 305 mm (12 inches). 3. The substrate shall be flat within 1/4 in. in a 4 foot radius. C. Performance Requirements: As a minimum, the coating materials shall be tested as follows: 1. Mildew/Fungus Resistance: ASTM D3273. 2. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B 117. 3. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G 155 - 5000 hours. 4. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B 117 - 300 hours. 5. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D964. 6. Absorption, Freeze/Thaw: ASTM C67 - 60 cycles. 7. Water Penetration: ASTM E331. 8. Wind Driven Rain: FED SPEC TT -C -555B. 9. Flame Spread: ASTM E84 - Flame Spread Index less than 25, Smoke Developed less than 250. 10. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96 - Vapor Permeable. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product data sheets describing prod- ucts which will be used on the project. B. Samples: The Contractor shall submit two samples of each finish, texture, and color to be used on the project. The same tools and techniques proposed for the actual installation shall be used to prepare the samples. Samples shall be of sufficient size to accurately represent each color and texture to be utilized on the project. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: All materials shall be obtained from one manufacturer. a. Materials shall be manufactured at a facility covered by a current ISO 9001 cer- tification. Certification of the facility shall be done by a registrar accredited by the American National Standards Institute, Registrar Accreditation Board (ANSI- RAB). 2. Contractor shall be knowledgeable in the installation of the materials and shall be experi- enced and competent in the application of the Exterior Architectural Coatings. Addition- ally, the contractor shall possess a current trained contractor certificate from manufacturer for any of its Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels intact. B. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage, freezing, or overheating. Ques- tionable materials shall not be used. C. Materials shall be stored at the job site in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight, protected from weather and other damage. Minimum storage temperature shall be 7 degrees C (45 degrees F) for Color Prime'M, 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) for Ameristone and 4 degrees C (40 degrees F) for all other products. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: I. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appro- priate protection is provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are dry. 2. At the time of application, the air and wall surface temperatures shall be minimum 50 degrees F. The temperature shall be maintained with adequate air ventilation and circula- tion, for a minimum of 24 hours thereafter, or until the products are dry. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation of the Exterior Architectural Coatings shall be coordinated with other construction trades. B. Sufficient manpower and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation, free of cold joints, scaffold lines, texture variations, etc. PART 2 -PRODUCT 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. All components of the Exterior Architectural Coatings shall be obtained from Dryvit (Bases of Design) or equal manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement shall be Type I, I-II or II, meeting ASTM C150, white or gray in color, fresh and free of lumps. B. Water shall be clean and free of foreign matter. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Base Coat (when specified): 1. Cementitious: A liquid polymer based material, which is field mixed in a 1:1 ratio by weight with Portland Cement. a. Shall be Genesis. 2. Ready Mixed: A dry blend cementitious, co -polymer based product, field mixed with water. a. Shall be Genesis DMT"' B. Reinforcing Mesh(es) (when specified) (required over EPS insulation): Shall be a balanced open weave, glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other System materials and shall be as noted in Paragraph 1.4.C.10 above. C. Primers and Adhesion Promoter (when specified): 1. Color Prime: Pigmented, acrylic based primer used to improve adhesion and uniformity of finish color. 2. Primer with Sand: Pigmented acrylic based primer with sand improves application of trowel -applied finishes. 3. Prymit: Acrylic based adhesion promoter for use over previously painted surfaces. D. Finishes: Shall be the type, color, and texture as selected by the Owner/Architect and shall be one or more of the following: 1. Standard DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water based, acrylic coatings with integral color and texture, and formulated with DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance) chemistry: a Quarzputz: Coarse texture. b. Sandblast, SandblastNTX: Medium texture. C. Freestyle, Freestyle Smooth, Freestyle Fine: Fine texture. d. Sandpebble, Sandpebble NT: Coarse pebble texture. e. Sandpebble Fine, Sandpebble Fine NT: Fine pebble texture. 2. Elastomerie DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water based elastomeric acrylic coatings with integral color and texture, and formulated with DPR chemistry: a. Weatherlastic Quarzputz: Coarse texture. b. Weatherlastic Sandpebble: Rough pebble texture. C. Weatherlastic Sandpebble Fine: Fine pebble texture. d. Weatherlastic Adobe: Finetexture. 3. Medallion Series PMR (Proven Mildew Resistance): Water based acrylic coatings with integral color and texture, and formulated with PMR (Proven Mildew Resistance) chem- istry: a. Quarzputz PMR: Coarse texture. b. Sandblast PMR, Sandblast NIX PMR: Medium texture. C. Freestyle PMR: Fine texture. d. Sandpebble PMR, Sandpebble NT PMR: Coarse pebble texture. e. Sandpebble Fine PMR, Sandpebble Fine NT PMR: Fine pebble texture. 4. Specialty Finishes: Factory mixed, water based acrylic: a. Ameristone: Multi colored quartz aggregate with a flamed granite appearance. b. Stone Mist: Ceramically colored quarts aggregate. C. Custom Brick: A template system resulting in a brick, stone or tile appearance. d. Lymestone: Simulates appearance of limestone. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to application of the coatings, the Contractor shall ensure that the substrate is of a type listed in Section I.4.B.1. B. Prior to the installation of the coatings, the General Contractor shall ensure that all needed flash- ings and other waterproofing details have been completed, if such completion is required prior to the application of the coatings. C. The Contractor shall notify the General Contractor of all discrepancies. Work shall not proceed until discrepancies have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. The substrates shall be prepared so as to be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, form - release agents, efflorescence, paint, wax, water repellants, moisture, frost and any other materials that inhibit adhesion. B. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Shall be dry and cured a minimum of 28 days. 2. All rough surfaces shall be skimmed with Dryvit Genesis or Genesis DM mixture to pro- vide a smooth, flat and level base. C. Exterior Cement and Calcium Silicate Boards: 1. Board surfaces shall be clean, dry and free of dust or other contaminates. 2. All fasteners shall be corrosion resistant and installed in a manner as to be flush with the surface of the board. D. Painted Surfaces: I. Shall be cleaned to remove all loose paint, dirt, dust, chalk, and any other materials that may inhibit adhesion. 2. Glossy surfaces shall be sanded to remove gloss, and cleaned. 3. Test patches, located in inconspicuous areas should be prepared to verify adhesion. A minimum of one test every 46 sq.m. (500 s.f) of wall area is recommended. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The materials shall be mixed and applied in accordance with current Dryvit printed Outsulation System Installation Instruction (DS204). B. Masonry Surfaces: 1. Apply a continuous layer of Genesis or Genesis DM mixture over the entire wall surface to fill voids and provide a smooth level base for finish application. 2. When specified, embed a layer of reinforcing mesh into the wet base coat mixture and trowel smooth. 3. Allow the Genesis or Genesis DM mixture to cure a minimum of 24 hours until com- pletely dry. Cool, humid conditions may require longer cure times. 4. Using a brush, roller, or airless spray equipment, apply a coat of Color Prime or Primer with sand (when specified) over the dry base coat surface, and allow to dry. 5. Apply the specified finish in accordance with Dryvit's printed instructions. C. Exterior Cement and Calcium Silicate Boards: 1. When specified, apply a continuous layer of Genesis or Genesis DM over the sheathing face and embed a layer of reinforcing mesh into the wet base coat mixture such that the entire surface of the board is covered. 2. Allow the Genesis or Genesis DM to cure a minimum of 24 hours until completely dry. Cool, humid conditions may require longer cure times. 3. If base coat is not specified, using a brush, roller, or airless spray equipment, apply a coat of Color Prime or Primer with sand over the face of the sheathing board and allow to dry. 4. Apply the specified finish in accordance with Dryvit's printed installation instructions. D. Painted Surfaces: 1. Using a brush, roller, or airless spray equipment, apply a coat of Prymit over the prepared surface, and allow to dry. 2. Apply the specified finish in accordance with Dryvit's printed installation instructions. NOTE: It is not recommended to skim painted surfaces with a cementitious base coat material. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper application of the Dryvit materials. 3.5 CLEANING A. All excess Dryvit materials shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor in accordance with contract provisions. B. All surrounding areas, where Dryvit coatings have been installed, shall be left free of debris and foreign substances resulting from the Contractor's work. 3.6 PROTECTION A. The Dryvit coatings and the project shall be protected from damage and exposure to dust and other contaminants until dry. END OF SECTION 09963 SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed, extruded -aluminum louvers. C. Louver Screening: 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2 -inch- square mesh, 0.063 -inch wire. 2.6 FINISHES A. Aluminum, High -Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. I. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refin- ished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION 10200 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and wind loads based on a uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward, without permanent deforma- PART 1 - GENERAL tion of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent o Lr) damage to fasteners and anchors. N U 1.1 SUMMARY B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thennal movements resulting from a temperature change (range) of 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces, by preventing buckling, opening of A. This Section includes the following: joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. T 1. Toilet and bath accessories. C. Air -Performance, Water -Penetration, and Wind -Driven Rain Ratings: As demonstrated by testing manu- 2. Under lavatory guards. facturer's stock units according to AMCA 500-L. � J 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.3 SUBMITTALS c A. Inserts and Anchorage: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices and coordinate delivery with other work to A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. avoid delay B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. B. Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in the U same areas. C5 1. Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on W �¢ Shop Drawings. C. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace z mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Samples: For each type of finish upon request of Architect. 0 CO _ D. Product test reports verifying compliance with applicable wind loads by testing methods approved by the PART 2 - PRODUCTS J v authority having jurisdiction. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2- PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. American Specialties, Inc. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Z may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Bradley Corporation. 1. Louvers: 2. Under lavatory Guards: a. Truebro,lnc. a. Airline Products Co. b. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Cesco Products. C. Greenheck. C d. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULE OF TOILET ACCESSORIES O A. Refer to drawings for the Schedule of Toilet Accessories. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. PART 3 - EXECUTION B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005. p U 3.1 INSTALLATION C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel. A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufac- turer. Install units level, plumb, and finely anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Provide block - 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL ing where required to meet force requirements indicted below. Ensure blocking is Fire retardant in walls that are rated or are otherwise required to be non-combustible A. Fabricate frames to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installa- tion tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least ',, ; ti C, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. B. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view. B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. C. Join frame members to each other and to louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view. END OF SECTION 10801 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Greenheck ESU or a comparable product of one of the following: a. Airline Products Co. b. Cesco Products. C. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Blade Profile: Plain blade without center baffle. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Performance Requirements: a. Free Area: Not less than 7.5 sq. fi. for 48 -inch- wide by 48 -inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 700 fpm. C. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10 -inch wg static pressure drop at free -area velocity. 2.5 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver. B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. a U) Z 0 Q U_ LL U W WJ c 0- w (3 C o Lr) ^' N U w. a a--� to U) T Co Y � J L M ILM- c m c 0 o 0 Z O m U E� C5 c W �¢ c t z U) 0 CO _ W J v a U) Z 0 Q U_ LL U W WJ c 0- w U a 0 J c In Z o� o C5 V U11- a a U) Z 0 Q U_ LL U W WJ c 0- w a J 0 Z N liJ pi Z C W O N Q W d N p U A-0010 ...-.4 U&4,4_A 10 000-=J0482566 AM 4 Room Finish Schedule ROOM NUMBER ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING REMARKS , j EMERGENCY LIGHTING 7�- U CEJ O U W WALL PACK Z z U 2'X 4' LAY IN x H t o o EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE CA 2 co 2 101 RECEPTION AREA C O DOWNLIGHTING L V 'O 24" x 42" LOCKABLE SERVICE ACCESS ® 4' STRIP L ® w HVAC RETURN AIR GRILLE LL FLUORESCENT LIGHT U E3 Cp o -12'-0" RE: A401 FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 102 TOWNHOUSE SHOW ROOM HVAC SUPPLY AR DIFFUSER co _ WALL LIGHT ® EXIT LIGHT ® EXHAUST FAN �--/� EMERGENCY LIGHTING WALL PACK 12`0" 103 CONDOMINIUM SHOW ROOM 104 CORRIDOR 12'-0" RE A401 FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 105 MENS RESTROOM 9' 0" - WATER PROOF TYPE GYR ON WALLS & CEILING 106 ADMIN. OFFICE 9,-0 11 107OFFICE 91-011 108 WOMEN'S RESTROOM � 9'-0" WATER PROOF TYPE GYP.ON WALLS & CEILING 109 CLOSET - 110 SELECTION ROOM - 111 OFFICEL _0 112 OFFICE113 L121-011 OFFICE 114 OFFICE +♦ 115 GALLERY AREA RE: A401 FOR INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1 Floor Plan SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" REAR A201-1 LEFT 6 RIGHT IRONT 1d *IN 10 G -�, 36 •��or -O%6Q--t. r i' N i if r Fin Da NOTES: 1. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET A401 FOR WALL TYPES 2. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET A601 FOR STOREFRONT/ 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF CMU, FAC CENTERLINE OF COLUMN. 4. ALL SPOT GRADES ARE TO BE VERIFIED W CIN 5. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXTERIOR WAL 2 Floor Finish Plan SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" REAR LEFT 6 RIGHT FRONT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT 11'-0" AFF TYP 5 Reflected Ceiling Legend SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 01 DESCRIPTION , r i' N i if r Fin Da NOTES: 1. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET A401 FOR WALL TYPES 2. SEE SCHEDULE SHEET A601 FOR STOREFRONT/ 3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF CMU, FAC CENTERLINE OF COLUMN. 4. ALL SPOT GRADES ARE TO BE VERIFIED W CIN 5. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXTERIOR WAL 2 Floor Finish Plan SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" REAR LEFT 6 RIGHT FRONT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT 11'-0" AFF TYP 5 Reflected Ceiling Legend SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 2'X 2' ATC METAL d EMERGENCY LIGHTING c� _ W SUSPENSION SYSTEM WALL PACK 2'X 4' LAY IN EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE FLUORESCENT LIGHT 2 co / CN rum C O DOWNLIGHTING L V 'O 24" x 42" LOCKABLE SERVICE ACCESS ® 4' STRIP L ® w HVAC RETURN AIR GRILLE LL FLUORESCENT LIGHT U E3 Cp o SURFACE MOUNTED v O ca w HVAC SUPPLY AR DIFFUSER co _ WALL LIGHT ® EXIT LIGHT ® EXHAUST FAN �--/� EMERGENCY LIGHTING WALL PACK GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT @ 114" AFF TYP 3 Reflected Reflected Ceiling SCALE 1/8" = 1'-0" REAR LEFT 6 RIGHT FRONT GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT 114" AFF TYP a / }io Z �JJ � aL V L t U � R d w Ln c� D W N ECD �co 2 co / CN rum C a L V 'O O L o 0 w O LL U E3 Cp C z v O ca w co co _ U a / }io Z �JJ � aL V L t Q� � R d w Ln c� D W E U 0 2 L V 'O O C w ^, W (0 U) cu O -@p t1L O (D v U li a a / }io Z �JJ � aL V A101 t � R d w Ln c� D 4 U A101 r <EVINP- 203424-203424_A20I 000- 3r22104 8:26:66 AIA ,g 3 T 0 PARAPET 123'-0" AFF OIL T 0 PARAPET 117'-0" AFF -_ OIL T 0 FIN FLR L L-. 100'-0" 1 Front Elevation SCALE 1/8" - T-0" SCALE: 1/8" - 1'-0" 2.3 2.6 3 1 17 13 TYP 18 18 12 6 1 N 0 0 a Lk 71, \ Q�- �6 Fir® 1Depf, \ �� Finallnsp.. ¢ U+ Data ` _< \ 1 C 3 Rear Elevation SCA -E: 1/8" 1'-0" Right Elevation SCALE: 1/8" - 1'-0" Schedule M S MK MATERIAL / REMARKS Q1 DIRECT APPLIED EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING, RE: SPECIFICATIONS O2 1" EIFS, RE SPECIFICATIONS AND COLOR SCHEDULE O3 3" EIFS, RE SPECIFICATIONS AND COLOR SCHEDULE ® SMALL EIFS ACCENT ELEMENT, RE: A302-10 O LARGE EIFS ACCENT ELEMENT, RE A302-8 © 4" WIDE, 2" THICK EIFS ACCENT BAND Q7 4" X 4" DOWNSPOUT TO STORM SEWER (D SCUPPER / CONDUCTOR,RE:A202-5 90 ROOF OVERFLOW SCUPPER, RE 202-5 10 AWNING, BLACK CANVAS ON PRE-ENGINEERED ALUM FRAMES 11 KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 STOREFRONT AND WINDOW FRAMING, RE: COLOR SCHEDULE 12 PREFINISHED ALUM COPING, RE SPECIFICATIONS 13 EIFS "V" REVEAL ACCENT, RE: A202-5 14 11/2" EIFS, RE SPECIFICATIONS AND COLOR SCHEDULE 15 EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURE, RE: A101 AND E101 16 BLDG UTILITY METER AND MAN DISCONNECT SWITCH, RE: E101-2 17 OUTLINE OF RTU BEYOND 18 OUTLINE OF ROOF BEYOND 19 RESTROOM EXHAUST FAN RAN HOOD 20 CONTROL JOINT 21 .053 ALUM COUNTER FLASHING IN GROUT JOINT 0 C IM C' A 0.1 — CS Color Schedule MK COLOR NO.lTYPE COLOR NAME OA ICI 2012 SWISS COFFEE OB ICI 1246 EBBTIDE BLUE © ICI 557 INDIAN CORN OD ICI 806 LEMON WEDGE OE IC1954 SILVER LACE VINE OF FLUROPON BONE WHITE © ICI 651 PAPIER-MACHE' OH >; BLACK NOTE GC TO SUBMIT ALL PANT/COLOR/FINISH SELECTIONS FOR OWNER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PLACING ORDER, TYPICAL. SCHEDULE COLORS INDICATED WITH 'ICI' PREFIX ARE TO MATCH THOSE COLORS AS MANUFACTURED BY IMPERIAL CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES. ACTUAL PAINT PRODUCTS TO BE BY ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AS INDICATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. G.C. TO VERIFY METHOD OF BLOCK FINISH/COLOR AWNING 2 ) (2.1 AWNING ,FIBER CANT FIBER CRICKET - TAPERED EDGE save y,•i r-� A202-4 A202-3 A202-1 FIBER CANT TAPERED ED 3 PLY BUILTUP ROOF X W/ MINERAL CAP SHEET 3 AWNING FIBER CANT 4'-4 3/8 " 4X6 PT WOOD CANT 4y/ TAPERED EDGE FIBER CRICKET-� %m.114., rz. CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES �, A202-4 ON PIPE SUPPORTS,A, RE: MECHANICAL (TYPICAL) AWNING A202-2 1 1 A202-2 -TAPERED EDGE s 06 PT WOOD CANT -FIBER CANT 3'-11 r r - FIBER CRICKET 5Roof Plan SCALE:1/8" = 1'-0" FIBER CRICKET ace[: /moi r -0r-0_ FIBER CANT FIBER CRICKET OR WOOD OVERBUILD TAPERE" i ro^-FIBER C TAPERED � L I I 2,3 2.6 I a I I a - AWNING op /2So Vo U �fz 3� REAR LEFT0RIGHT FRONT U CD C 4-1 o C O ry� VJ N U N E_ Q -1— v) >; (l co i 504 r M o + f6 n3 w `¢z4 C "C O OO LL U E o tJ �2 z W w U)�_ oQ) z v I a I I a - AWNING op /2So Vo U �fz 3� REAR LEFT0RIGHT FRONT CD -1-N O U N Q 70 o + c w `¢z4 @ CID 00 N O o tJ U LL W I a I I a - AWNING op /2So Vo U �fz 3� REAR LEFT0RIGHT FRONT CD O N Q 3 N O O Y W z o ._. a,11_A, G000 21-01 _ C:., 1 U HATCH ,—BASE FLASHING AND MINERAL CAP SHEET 4 X 6 PT WOOD CANT 'B AS READ. ROOFING SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED BY VFR. 5/8" CDX PLYWOOD DECKING - 311 X 411 X&" PL WELDED SOLa ID TO X 2" 1/2 " x 24" PLYWD�" BAR CARRIER FOR LADDER WALLPROTECTION i' MIN. FOUR LOCATIONS AT LADDER /,-2" X 2" X 5/6" ANGLE �AME W/PRE-DRILLED fORHRUNGS00 O.C. 311 r" r 4' / 18 H" RUOANGLEN LEGS BOTTOM RUNG 12" r WELDED ON ENDSAND INSIDE CONTACT MAX. ABOVE FLOOR POINTS NOTE : PROVIDE INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENT FRAME/ BLOCKING ABOVE WALL FOR LADDER BRACING/ SUPPORT. Access Scuttle SCALE 1" - 1'-0" j� —Yq11 MIN. NTS —EIFS THICKNESS VARIES RE A201 —SUBSTRATE VARIES RE: A101 5 TXpical EIFS "V"Groove Reveal SCALE 3" = 1'-0" OUTLINE OF EQUIP BASE 1�"—Z -CLIP HOLD DOWNS RE; MECHANICAL 20 GA GALV SKIRT FLASHING FASTENER W/ NEOPRENE WASHER AT 8" OC BASE FLASHING MINERAL CAP SHEET FIBER CANT 'ROOFING PLIES RE: SPECIFICATIONS r CDX PLYWOOD DECKING RE: STRUCTURAL SIMPSON TIES FOR CURB -TO -STRUCTURE CONNECTION, RE STRUCTURAL N0TE7CURB BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR i 2 Equipment Curb SCALE 11/2" - 1'-0" LEAD FLASHING, ROLL INTO PIPE 1" MIN WENT PIPE OR ,,---VENT PIPE BUILT-UP ROOFING W/ MINERAL CAP SHEET CDX PLYWOOD DECKING RE:STRUCTURAL PIPE FLANGE 3 Vent Pipe Penetration Detail SCALE 11/2" - 1'-0" 1" EIFS, RE A201 .040 ALUM SCUPPER -- LINER W/ HEMMED EDGE FASTENER W/ NEOPRENE WASHER .053 PREFINISHED ALUM SCUPPER CONDUCTOR .040 PREFINISHED ALUM COUNTER FLASHING BEHIND CONDUCTOR AND OVER 1" EIFS 12"CMU,8"CMU AT SIM 4 X 4 PREFINISHED ALUM— DOWNSPOUT CCl�TIll AI A n 4 Scupper / Conductor Detail SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" --EXTERIOR ARCHICTURAL COATING REGLET WITH SCUPPER FLANGE IN GROUT JOINT BASE FLASHING SEALED TO SCUPPER LINER —ROOFING PLIES W/ MINERAL CAP, RE SPECIFICATIONS CDX PLYWOOD DECKING, RE STRUCTURAL PRE-ENGINEERED ROOF TRUSS BEYOND RE: STRUCTURAL OL BO MASONRY OPENING 115'-4" AFF .053 PREFINISHED ALUM SCUPPER CONDUCTOR 4 X 4 PREFINISHED ALI DOWNSPOUT DOWNSPOUT STRAPS 5'-0"OC 11111111[9Kill) ■ ]61C92Wtic I 8 16" X 4" OVERFLOW _if OPENING IZ a w h w C3 i CLo Al W N U � E_ E'^ G -C wCL v!COCO c Y N @ ? M a@ w 1 W^ c U) Q — m no W t1 /Il o `o (D 2E a U L� w C 2 Zm w co CD �_ U a w h w L i U 1 w G -C wCL c -o ? o w 1 W^ c U) Q cu O-0 .` W t1 /Il . O (D U a Y a w h w A202 N O G wCL Q N O Y w V Z W N A202 I:E'✓INP-203424-203424 4301000-3/2210482616$AM A3D1-5 06 T 0 EIFS CORNICE 117'-2 1/2" A F F I I PRE-ENGINEERED 1 WOOD TRUSSES, - RE STRUCTURAL 81, CMU 3" EIFS ----- T 0 MASONRY OPENING 1 112'-0" A F F KAWNEER TRIFAB - 400 ARCHED STOREFRONT A302-5 OIL B 0 MASONRY OPENING , J---- II/2" GYP BRD -4" METAL STUD FURRING 016 T 0 FINISH FLOOR 100'-0" 1" EIFS 12" CMU- Transverse MU OFFICE 113 Transverse Building Section SCALE 1/2" - 1'-0" 12" CMU W/ EXTERIOR -- Refer to the window manufacturer's guidelines FASTENERS THROUGH HOLD ARCHITECTURAL for specific installation requirements. DOWN, 8" OC. COATING BOTH SIDES NN / ,-.040 PREFINISHED ALUM 4" CMU W/ EXTERIOR CAP FLASHING W/ CONT ARCHITECTURAL U U i .053 ALUM HOLD DOWN COATING BOTH SIDES fig 1 WINDOW DEAD CLIPS REGLET IN GROUT / -4 X 6 PT WOOD CANT JOINT _ U FASTENERS THROUGH BASE FLASHING-� Alta tied to Wall NEOPRENE WASHER 4� UPS' AT 8" OC ROOFING PLIES W/ _- ------ --- BASE FLASHING MINERAL CAP SHT, RE: SPECIFICATIONS \ \, CU FIBER CANT--- ANTTAPERED ROOF PLIES W/ MINERAL TAPEREDEDGE— A� \ CAP SHEET STRIP Wrap Reinforcingg — 'TAPERED EDGE STRIP CDX PLYWOOD -- A -5/e' CDX PLYWOOD DECKING = DECKING PRE-ENGINEERED -- - PT WOOD BLOCKING ROOF TRUSSES, Nailing fin PRE-ENGINEERED ROOF RE: STRUCTURAL - TRUSS, RE: STRUCTURAL KAWNEER TRIFAB 400' 1 m o WINDOW SYSTEM ANCHOR BOLTS, RE STRUCTURAL RE: A601 -- " m SILL FLASHING EXTEND—' Cap Flashing Detail TO GROUT JOINT 1'-0" J U Of Window Bond 12" CMU W/ EXTERIOR -- C '0 Z ARCHITECTURAL ov Window Nailing COATING ON EXTRIOR , = SILL IN BED OF SEALANT- ., CO 2 Parapet Window Detail SCALE: 1" - 1'-O" a 2 2.3 I LINE OF PARAPET BEYOND -3 PLY BUILT-UP ROOF - -- W/ MINERAL CAP SHEET 6" BATT INSUL ! R-19 1 PRE-ENGINEERED I WOOD GIRDER RE STRUCTURAL Ills r't SUSPENDED CEILING CEILING COFFER BEYOND �- --PILASTER BEYOND 4" METAL FRAMING ��- /z" GYP BOARD GALLERY i I'1 AREA INTERIOR STOREFRONT WINDOW 115 -PRE-HUNG INTERIOR DOOR I RE DOOR SCHEDULE 4" METAL FRAMING GYP BOARD �4" CONC SLAB Z RE: STRUCTURAL 3 5 1 CDX PLYWOOD / 7a 6 - .040 PREFINISHED ALUM CAP FLASHING W/ CONT PT WOOD BLOCKING .053 ALUM HOLD DOWN - '-= FASTENERS THROUGH CLIPS - - NEOPRENE WASHER ` AT 8" OC U�a U u SEALANT SEALANT ANCHOR BOLTS 48" OCA RE: STRUCTURAL 12" CMU W/ EXTERIOR-� 2" 1 � ARCHITECTURAL COATING, BOTH SIDES EIFS ACCENT BAND 3 Parapet Cap Flashing Detail SCALE 11/2" = l'-0" KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 WINDOW SYSTEM, RE: A601 SEALANT CONT PT SHAPED WOOD BLOCK AT SILL .040 PREFINISHED ALUM SILL FLASHING W/ .053 CONT HOLD DOWN CLIP. FASTENERS BELOW WOOD BLOCKING AT 8" OC. PT WOOD BLOCKING, ALLOW EIFS TO EXTEND UNDER FLASHING AT EACH END OF SILL MIN, 11/2" CONTINUE SILL FLASHING OVER EIFS AND SEAL PER EIFS MFG RECOMMENDATIONS. `8" OR 12" (SEE PLAN) CMU W/ EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL ` COATING \� 15/8" METAL FURRING, RE: A101 1/2" GYP BRD 4 EIFS Sill Detail SCALE 11/2" - P-0" v .-KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 WINDOW SYSTEM W/ SILL, 1/4" SHIM, BACKER ROD AND SEALANT. RE: A601 SEALANT -/ -.040 PREFINISHED ALUM SILL FLASHING W/ .053 CONT HOLD DOWN CLIP. FASTENERS AT 8" OC. 6 Sill Detail SCALE: 11/2" • 1'-0" CONT PT SHAPED WOOD BLOCK AT SILL 8" OR 12" (SEE PLAN) CMU W/ EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING 15/8' METAL FURRING RE: A101 1/2" GYP BRD TOWNHOUSE SHOWROOM 102 VNEER TRIFAB 400 DOW SYSTEM A601 GYP BRD IT WOOD BLOCKING METAL FURRING A1D1 GYP BRD 7 SWindow Sill / Head / Jamb Detail - 3 A301-3 T 0 PARAPET gik 1 121'-0'AFF I I I I A301-2 1 T 0 MASONRY OPENING 119'-0" A F f I , I , I , I , I , I , - t I I 141ill 7 B 0 MASONRY OPENING I 114'-0"AFF WINDOW AWNING s' (BEYOND) EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL --- COATING - 12" CMU SUSPENDED CEILING GYP BRD- 1 15/g' METAL STUD FURRING I - T 0 MASONRY OPENING 108'4"AFF L >1 l A301-4 it 1%" METAL STUD FURRING ) \� J I/Z" GYP BRD-___- -WINDOW AWNING -KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 WINDOW SYSTEM RE WINDOW SCHEDULE B 0 MASONRY OPENING 101'-8"AFF EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING 12" CMU FOUNDATION RE: STRUCTURAL training Refer to the window manufacturer's guidelines FASTENERS THROUGH HOLD for specific installation requirements. DOWN, 8" OC. NN / ,-.040 PREFINISHED ALUM • � O O CAP FLASHING W/ CONT AdhesiyelyOr U U i .053 ALUM HOLD DOWN fig 1 WINDOW DEAD CLIPS / -4 X 6 PT WOOD CANT � _ U FASTENERS THROUGH Same finned windows are considered "selhflmhed'. Nnwever, a careful examination Alta tied to Wall NEOPRENE WASHER 4� UPS' AT 8" OC should be made of the joinery between the head, jamb and all fin+ fa enure _- ------ --- BASE FLASHING SEALANT _ CU mnhnuom prolecial against air and wafer passage. Any breach in the window's ROOF PLIES W/ MINERAL ` \ CAP SHEET `x Wrap Reinforcingg — 'TAPERED EDGE STRIP A -5/e' CDX PLYWOOD the window manufacturer for installation recommendations Aesh DECKING 2t L- PT WOOD BLOCKING O Nailing fin PRE-ENGINEERED ROOF N - TRUSS, RE: STRUCTURAL 3" EIFS 1 m o a ANCHOR BOLTS, RE STRUCTURAL 8" CMU- -' f�i m 5 Parapet Cap Flashing Detail SCALE 11/2" 1'-0" VNEER TRIFAB 400 DOW SYSTEM A601 GYP BRD IT WOOD BLOCKING METAL FURRING A1D1 GYP BRD 7 SWindow Sill / Head / Jamb Detail - 3 A301-3 T 0 PARAPET gik 1 121'-0'AFF I I I I A301-2 1 T 0 MASONRY OPENING 119'-0" A F f I , I , I , I , I , I , - t I I 141ill 7 B 0 MASONRY OPENING I 114'-0"AFF WINDOW AWNING s' (BEYOND) EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL --- COATING - 12" CMU SUSPENDED CEILING GYP BRD- 1 15/g' METAL STUD FURRING I - T 0 MASONRY OPENING 108'4"AFF L >1 l A301-4 it 1%" METAL STUD FURRING ) \� J I/Z" GYP BRD-___- -WINDOW AWNING -KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 WINDOW SYSTEM RE WINDOW SCHEDULE B 0 MASONRY OPENING 101'-8"AFF EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING 12" CMU FOUNDATION RE: STRUCTURAL training Refer to the window manufacturer's guidelines Subslydfe for specific installation requirements. NN Insulalion Board • � O O J AdhesiyelyOr U U N fig 1 WINDOW DEAD Alethani[ally � � _ U 1 Same finned windows are considered "selhflmhed'. Nnwever, a careful examination Alta tied to Wall co 4� UPS' ca should be made of the joinery between the head, jamb and all fin+ fa enure -1a a U _ CU mnhnuom prolecial against air and wafer passage. Any breach in the window's , (0 NM outer cladding should be rewherdwilh additional flashing and/or sealant. Consult Wrap Reinforcingg — a@ Q the window manufacturer for installation recommendations Aesh my 2t L- o O Nailing fin _o mu N O Praledive Wrap Reinforcing Reinforcin Mesh' m o a �t Sealant Will) Closed Lapped Info Sill Flashing tmbe In _� Base Coat m - Cell Bother Rad Fyp, Around Entire Penmafe oCD Sealant With J U Of Window Bond Breaker C '0 Z A --i ov Window Nailing With fin Slope EIFS Below Si116:I Ain -� w CO Sill Pan Flashing Wdh V Ci LL a fumed Up Sides, Sloped - For Positive Drainage Fig_2 WINDOW SILL AND JAMB the purpose of a sill pan f6hing is to catch water that Conosion Resislanl may breach the window's limier or pan 6eyond Poo Blocking sealant the flashing should extend between the framing member at the laugh opening and be sloped to allow Wrap Reinforcinngg voter to drain to the outside of the EIFS. the spacer All o nos anal should hold the (wiling fin off of the sill pan xlention Irl at_least 1/8'0 mm) to farm drainage Spacer Material - 'tunnels. s r Insulation Board Beneath Sill Affected With Mechanical - fasteners Leave bop Open Sealant Th oec. g a aer l 0e d11 1 ag- Ny SS O real ryals] I ya pens. IMA N MI ,0. e5pa IbIdN r12f,E An na WMIUIm ES E..... OR IMPt,EO ISSUFa aR MPDE 9Y EIMw W / wee Ecilory wlPt INESEOMwniGs nnocoMA Enc$a11RrGM"IMa rNF rsE aF E1Fs. rMzed Mg x.e n9 CIFS Id.sl Fa mbar at ... d t o m °a ana sn a a M .ea W f t rw,n. EIf3 »I 1 c ,g weC,lce M naMeU v Y abs Malec"oral WllJbghzlanA 3000 o.W.9, Cents Gll. Marzaw, ca 3"Ee9 xM1"'dl m a aacarm mm,. m, pa` b coon Atl1 EtFs I a,phwnn Ib lou g aaz. e I a e ppfiYabm GIMxeNE MN,n yY1 e9Vtr I.ib. ail e[ (m ly avin ElPS IM'' a tlU m M1 tl (800)294-W2"Vx G^a Va'Ga by d M. 1 W V Vcl al told sor n,clN tl M EIFS pmC a! p x1R altlkabN hr.+l M Ia' g aM a N on L"A ria NNIII WP Ty tl II IEIFStl edl pl Ge J IVq " Nap G g a o 1' + w- Ins I I m e r aal ca r r In un Id�"wa l I a rPv"�� as rzag ear m JmA QeR XCn9a Mp Grim 1 C INPoY iWdi. U ualpFl :9. They 2,aa.. am m eoh"arm mad Gael m I zwo,ar,e a,a"o I e dm n pactm wI orreve r. can our tssus:6,o9 rlN m"SA 'Tb Gawings nl ml�edn aaa.Iv.,a.uoa ior.tluo-Y.q amuwi V.Im ,ce alemeuw wwuw.uor.,,xy dtlewpuel MttpM. erlm. mea arervinq aM ma.aame aPph aehm mnaW Elfa Vraaacuee elwanmryaann.e A; no waem.ale,n of 1A cm.enmumceper. 8 EIFS Sill SCALE NTS a r� C NN • � O O J U U N 0 m � � _ U 1 u \TVC 0 � co 4� UPS' ca -1a a U a U C 0 N 0 � Q� E� 1 Cl) co Ox ca CU Q , (0 NM a@ Q rZ my 2t L- o O Q _o mu N O w C m o a �t m w U)�Z oCD o J U Qm y a Ae, a, U J� wg J. � J• 'Ll v L^ 0 0 � Q� Cl) U Ox ca Q Q rZ 2t O W N O z Y j o ga Qm C '0 Z A --i ov o w CO � V Ci LL a Ae, a, U J� wg J. � J• 'Ll v A301 0 0 � 6 Z w Ox Z W N O z Y j a � o A301 L BP-ZW124- 203424�13U2000-3221114825.661-M n 1� 1 SCALE: 1/2" 1'-0" "TR OF EIFS ELEMENT AT CTR POINT OF ARCHED EIFS BAND ABOVE, RE: A201 ;DIY SECTION A 0 EIFS Accent Element Detail V SCALE 3/4" = 1'-0" CMU W/ EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING OR EIFS (THICKNESS VARIES) RE A201 COLUMN FOOTING CDX PLYWOOD ^40 PREFINISHED ALUM iPING W/ .053 ALUM �LDDOWN CLIPS 6TENER THROUGH :OPRENE WASHERS OC 9 Para ei SCALE 11/2" - V-0" Return CoDin ALANT BOTH SIDES WOOD BLOCKING D BEVELED SIDING EIFS CDX PLYWOOD GALV METAL PARAPET rLTURN FRAMING, RE: A201& STRUCTURAL Detail ,I- BACKER ROD AND SEALANT i24EXTEND CONC CURB TO WOOD BLOCKING #4 REBAR CONT 2.6 2.3 Sim 63/4" 6314 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONC CURB • W/ EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING TS COLUMN, RE: STRUCTURAL --PT WOOD BLOCKING v R_9" R DENSGLASS GOLD 35/8" 18 GA GALV METAL FRAMING (TYP) SHAPED PT WOOD BLOCKING AT 24" OC EIFS (THICKNESS VARIES) 2 Column Section SCALE 1" = T -O" 12" CMU 3" EIFS BACKWR SUSPENDED CEILING RE: A101 SEALANT EXTERIOR ARCHECTURt - COATING KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 WINDOW SYSTEM, RE A601 4 Arched Window Head Detail SCALE 11/2" - T-0" V2" GYP BRD WOOD BLOCKING AT CEILING COFFER Ile PILASTER BEYOND 15/8' METAL FURRING /z' GYP BRD- ` i SEALANT / 6 Window Head Detail SCALE: 11/2" - 1'-O" TR OF EIFS ELEMENT T 111'-7" AAF AND ENTERED ON COLUMN ELOW, RE: A201 9, 'DENSGLASS GOLD -1/2" EIFS CANOPY BULKHEAD BEYOND BACKER ROD AND SEALANT 8" CMU W/ EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING, RE A201 KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 STOREFRONT,RE A601 n1 8" CMU W/ 3" EIFS RE A201 SECTION A �I f1 Small EIFS Accent Element Detail V SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" FASTENER THROUGH PREFINISHED 0.040 ALUM NEOPRENE WASHEREDGE FLASHING W/ .053 i 8" OC �- HOLD DOWN CLIP PT 4 X 6 WOOD, --PT SHAPED WOOD CANT �� �V BLOCKING. BASE FLASHING-- ROOF LASHING— ROOF PLIES W/ ---- MINERAL /— -MINERAL CAP — SHEET `lo 2" SEALANT TAPERED EDGE COX PLYWOOD ,, I 11/2" EIFS DECKING DENSGLASS GOLD CONT PT WOODS CANOPY ROOF FRAMING BLOCKING RE: STRUCTURAL -WOOD BLOCKING BETWEEN RAFTERS 3Canopy Edge Flashing Detail SCALE: COLUMN - BEYOND .040 ALUM COUNTER FLASHING 1" EIFS KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 WINDOW SYSTEM RE A601 BACKER ROD AND SEALANT SILL FLASHING W/ INTERIOR HEM SEALANT PT WOOD SILL PLATE EIFS SILL TRIM W/ DRAINAGE MEDIUM PER EIMA AND MFG INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS, RE: A302-8 1%" METAL FRAMING, RE A101 /2" GYP BIRD 5 Arched Window Sill Detail SCALE: 11/2" 1'-0" 8" OR 12" (SEE PLAN) CMU -•. W/ EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL COATING, ON EXTERIOR FACES RE A101 /2" GYP BRD _ 1%" METAL FURRING RE A101 SEALANT `_f KAWNEER TRIFAB 400 SYSTEM,RE A601 7 Window Head Detail SCALE 11/2" - T-0" 4" PVC SOFFIT VENT W SCREEN, RE SPECIFICATI( DENSGLASS GOLD 1�/z" EIFS, RE:A101 1'-8" 1�/2" 11 Bulkhead & EIFS W" Reveal Detail SCALE: 11/2" = 1'-0" FRAMING UCTURAL SGLASS GOLD S, RE A201 a w U Lo ^� W N 1 U 75 a -0 Cn +� C0 G J � @r ' N LLM C: m 'v Z s-- 0 0 W 11 N LL U L3 a `c z c z Y o co w w Z w a w L 0 U 75 a -0 C0 G J � a o C: CU) Z oa W 11 O `J U Ii a U a w 0 0 � a J � I MM A302 0 0 � a z MM mm U N O z Y w w Y A302 SECTION - I I CEILING RE: RCP, LlNON LOAD BEARING PARTITION WALL SHALL TERMINATE ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM. 4" STUD CHANNEL 1 / 25 GA. UNLESS SPECIFIED CONCRETE SLAB RE:STRUCTURAL DWGS PLAN Z % 4" MTL STUDS 25 GA., �1/2' GYP BOARD BOTH SIDES, 24" O.C. UNLESS SPECIFIED TAPED, SANDED 4" METAL STUD WALL SCALE 1" • T-0" RE: A101 SECTION ra�ln,re»�m 4" STUD CHANNEL 25 GA. UNLESS SPECIFIED %2" GYP BOARD SHALL TERMINATE 6" ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM. PLAN L 4" MTL STUDS 25 GA., 1/Z" GYP BOARD TAPED, SANDED 24" O.C. UNLESS SPECIFIED 8" REINFORCED FURRING ONLY WALL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"5NOTE: RE: A101 RE: EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES SECTION CEILING RE: RCP 12" CMU 1%" METAL FURRING %2" GYP BOARD SHALL TERMINATE 6" ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM. J L PLAN = II 1/2" GYP BOARD OVER 1%" METAL FURRING, TAPED, SANDED 6 12" REINFORCED FURRING ONLY WALL SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" NOTE RE: A101 RE; EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES SECTION CEILING RE RCP. NON LOAD BEARING PARTITION WALL SHALL TERMINATE ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM. 6" STUD CHANNEL 25 GA. UNLESS SPECIFIED - -CONCRETE SLAB RB STRUCTURAL DWGS o PLAN 6" MTL STUDS 25 GA., /z" GYP BOARD BOTH SIDES, 24" O.C. UNLESS SPECIFIED TAPED, SANDED 2 6" METAL STUD WALL SCALE: 1" = 14" RE: A101 FRONT ELEVATION OPEN THRU REAR ELEVATION RIGHT ELEVATION �L 1 7 L L- �1 �. LEFT ELEVATION RECEPTION AREA INT. ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-D" SECTION PLAN CEILING RE: RCP. (TYP BOTH SIDE 8" CMU 1%" METAL FURRING (TYP BOTH SIDES) - I/i" GYP BOARD SHALL TERMINATE 6" ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM. (TYP BOTh SIDES) 38" REINFORCED FU SCALE: 1" - 1'-0" RE: A101 OPEN THRU FRONT ELEVATION VER I%" METAL %LADED JG ONLY WALL NOTE: FURRING ON ONE SIDE AT SIM RE: EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES RIGHT ELEVATION OPEN 1 LEFT ELEVATION 8_CORRIDOR INT. ELEVATIONS SCALE; 1/8" - 1'-0" SECTION T 0 FRAMING E ----- A F _F ---- A.FF COUNTERTOP (VERIFY REQUIREMENTS W/ OWNER) 6" STUD CHANNEL 25 GA. UNLESS SPECIFIED I 1/2" DIA. EPDXY BOLT / W/ 3" MIN. IMBEOMENT I I / I I , CONCRETE SLAB I. / RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS , PLAN 6" MTL STUDS 25 GA 5/E" GYP BOARD BOTH SIDES, 24" O.C. UNLESS SPECIFIED TAPED, SANDED _6" METAL STUD WALL (PARTIAL HEIC SCALE 1' = V-0" 1_ RE A101 NOTE: REFERENCE SHEET A101 FOR FINISHES AND SHEET A601 FOR DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULES. LI� REAR ELEVATION W O U L��L _IlIi �J �LJ F-2 �; OPEN THRU L�� 0 Lii FRONT ELEVATION OPEN THRU REAR ELEVATION RIGHT ELEVATION �L 1 7 L L- �1 �. LEFT ELEVATION RECEPTION AREA INT. ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-D" SECTION PLAN CEILING RE: RCP. (TYP BOTH SIDE 8" CMU 1%" METAL FURRING (TYP BOTH SIDES) - I/i" GYP BOARD SHALL TERMINATE 6" ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM. (TYP BOTh SIDES) 38" REINFORCED FU SCALE: 1" - 1'-0" RE: A101 OPEN THRU FRONT ELEVATION VER I%" METAL %LADED JG ONLY WALL NOTE: FURRING ON ONE SIDE AT SIM RE: EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES RIGHT ELEVATION OPEN 1 LEFT ELEVATION 8_CORRIDOR INT. ELEVATIONS SCALE; 1/8" - 1'-0" SECTION T 0 FRAMING E ----- A F _F ---- A.FF COUNTERTOP (VERIFY REQUIREMENTS W/ OWNER) 6" STUD CHANNEL 25 GA. UNLESS SPECIFIED I 1/2" DIA. EPDXY BOLT / W/ 3" MIN. IMBEOMENT I I / I I , CONCRETE SLAB I. / RE: STRUCTURAL DWGS , PLAN 6" MTL STUDS 25 GA 5/E" GYP BOARD BOTH SIDES, 24" O.C. UNLESS SPECIFIED TAPED, SANDED _6" METAL STUD WALL (PARTIAL HEIC SCALE 1' = V-0" 1_ RE A101 NOTE: REFERENCE SHEET A101 FOR FINISHES AND SHEET A601 FOR DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULES. LI� REAR ELEVATION RIGHT ELEVATION LEFT ELEVATION ILI r] F-11 7" 9 GALLERY INT. ELEVATIONS SCALE: W O U OPEN THRU 0 Lii N RIGHT ELEVATION LEFT ELEVATION ILI r] F-11 7" 9 GALLERY INT. ELEVATIONS SCALE: INSTALLATION: ANGLE SUPPORT TO BE PROVIDED AT E ALL HALF HEIGHT WALLS WITHIN 6" OF $ ANY FREE END AND SPACED AMAX. OF 4'-0" O.C. s SECTION A -A m t a V En a W O U 0 ^U� N N W U QQ o 0 U� E 70CDO p� v O a CCi C C;-.4 o #1012" W E U OK CSCREWS 4 /Vi a 6" MTL STUDS 25 GA, 24" �� ;Y %! � ^W 1 ^ - O.C. UNLESS SPECIFIED ` m 6x8x/4" STEEL PLATE 4 a -0 2x2x1/4" STEEL ANGLE _ w w EXTEND ANGLE FULL — loe m HEIGHT OF METAL U� W FRAMING / r a m r 4 a 11/2" DIA. EPDXY BOLT � W/ 3" MIN. IMBEDMENT /� s INSTALLATION: ANGLE SUPPORT TO BE PROVIDED AT E ALL HALF HEIGHT WALLS WITHIN 6" OF $ ANY FREE END AND SPACED AMAX. OF 4'-0" O.C. s SECTION A -A m t a V En a W O U 0 N U QQ w E 70CDO O C /RSI.p w W E O `V L Y /Vi a o � ^W 1 ^ - U w ^' u W V0 o -0 w w `f n�! o V m o U� W m a � m r 4 E � � Ago � 0 N QQ w N O Z Y 3 � o w mx d � m U Ago � KEVIN P-203424 - 203424A402,000 - 3722(04 8 25 66 AM 4" 6'-8" WOMEN'S RESTROOM iA A402 3 1osc DOOR 2 4" MEN'S RESTROOM L 2 OPP. 3 P. A402 OPP. 4 OPP. �i]6C 11 DOOR 2'-4" 1 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLAN SCALE 1/4 " = 1"0" RE: A101-1 3'-6" 2 INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE 1/4" " 1'-0" RE: 6A40-4 3'-0" 1'-6" 03 4 4'-5" 3 INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE /4" = 1'-0" RE 6A40-4 KEY DESCRIPTION BOBRICK MODEL BRADLEY MODEL ASI MODEL REMARKS 01 LIQUID -SOAP DISPENSER B-40 MPO-PS6000 2000 HIGH IMPACT REST. ABS PLASTIC -SURFACE MOUNT. 02 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER B-2888 5402 0030 STAINLESS STEEL, MULTIROLL SURFACE MOUNTED 03 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER B-262 250-150000 0210 STAINLESS STEEL SURFACE MOUNTED ® MIRROR UNIT B-294 782 0600TA 16" X 30" TILT MIRROR W/ STANLESS STEEL FRM. (D 36" GRAB BAR 6806 8120-001360 3800-36" STAINLESS STEEL, SATIN FINISH © 42" GRAB BAR 6806 8120-001420 3800-42 STAINLESS STEEL, STAIN FINISH NOTES: ALL ACCESSORIES ARE TO BE MOUNTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACCESSIBILITY CRITERIA OF AMERICAN WITH DISABILITIES ACT, STATE AND LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY CODES. HANDICAP TOILET ACCESSORIES SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES, INSTALL SUPPORT BLOCKING IN WALLS WHERE NECESSARY FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES, INCLUDING GRAB BARS. REFER TO MANUFACTURING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE INSULATION ON DRAINS AND HOT WATER LINES AT HANDICAP LAVATORIES. 7 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE /2" GYP BRD TYP BOTH SIDES 4" MTL STUD 6" MTL STUD 4" MTL STUD 1' LINE OF SOFFIT I ABOVE TYP E OF SOFFIT )VE TYP GYP BRD BOTH SIDES ITL STUD ITL STUD UCTURAL WOOD COLUMN STRUCTURAL 4 INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE: '/4" = 1'-0" RE: A401-6 8 PILASTER DETAIL SCALE 11/2 1'-0" RE A101-1 \i GYP BRD TYP I%" MTL STUD 12" CMU RE:A201FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES 3%" MTL STUD 1%" MTL STUD LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE TYP LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE TYP p" GYP BRD TYP BOTH SIDES 6" MTL STUD 8" MTL STUD STRUCTURAL WOOD COLUMN RE STRUCTURAL PILASTER DETAIL PILASTER DETAIL PILASTER DETAIL SCALE: 11/2 " = 1'-0" 12 SCALE 11/2 " 1' 0" 13 RE•:A10111/2 " • V-0" RE A101-1 RI: A101-1 6" MTL STUD 4" MTL STUD I o M FINISH FLOOR H.C. GRAB BAR MIRROR SOAP TOILET PAPER CENTERED DISPENSER TISSUE TOWEL AT LAV. DISPENSER DISPENSER - o 0 - N N \ _ FINISH FLOOR H.C. WATER WALL MTD. H.C. DRINKING CLOSET LAVATORY FOUNTAN 5 ACCESSORIES AND FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS NTS 9 PILASTER DETAIL SCALE: 11/2 " = 1'-0" RE A101-1 LINE OF SOFFIT GYP BRD TYP 1%" MTL STUD 12" CMU RE A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES 35/8" MTL STUD 4" MTL STUD 3%" MTL STUD 1%" MTL STUD LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE TYP s� ABOVE TYP GYP BRD TYP BOTH SIDES -- STRUCTURAL WOOD COLUMN RE:STRUCTURAL 6" MTL STUD — 4" MTL STIP x -- 8" MTL STUD 6" MTL STUD 14 PILASTER DETAIL SCALE 11/2 " = 1'-0" RE: A101-1 3 N WOMEN PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER TOILET COMPLYING WITH ADA LOCAL CO E. SIGN TO HAVE RAISED AND BRAILLE CHARACTERS AND PICTORIAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY MOUNT 5'-0" TO CENTERLINE A.F.F. SIGN SIZE 8"X8" COLOR: GRAY WITH WHITE CHARACTERS 6 Accessible Signage SCALE: N.T.S. 10 PILASTER DETAIL SCALE 11/2 " = P-0" RE: A101-1 r' S15s� PILASTER DETAIL ICALE 11/2 " = 1'-O" RE: A101-1 LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE TYP /2" GYP BRD TYP 1%" MTL STUD 12" CMU RE: A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES 3%" MTL STUD I%" MTL STUD 8" CMU RE: A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES —LINE OF SOFFIT / ABOVE TYP '/2" GYP BRD I� z TYP BOTH SIDES 18/8" MTL STUD i --35/8" MTL STUD 8" CMU RE A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES ---4" MTL STUD 1� '1-6" MTL STUD 4" MTL STUD 11, ;za i-+ C Lo MEN s 3 N WOMEN PROVIDE (1) SIGN PER TOILET COMPLYING WITH ADA LOCAL CO E. SIGN TO HAVE RAISED AND BRAILLE CHARACTERS AND PICTORIAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY MOUNT 5'-0" TO CENTERLINE A.F.F. SIGN SIZE 8"X8" COLOR: GRAY WITH WHITE CHARACTERS 6 Accessible Signage SCALE: N.T.S. 10 PILASTER DETAIL SCALE 11/2 " = P-0" RE: A101-1 r' S15s� PILASTER DETAIL ICALE 11/2 " = 1'-O" RE: A101-1 LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE TYP /2" GYP BRD TYP 1%" MTL STUD 12" CMU RE: A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES 3%" MTL STUD I%" MTL STUD 8" CMU RE: A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES —LINE OF SOFFIT / ABOVE TYP '/2" GYP BRD I� z TYP BOTH SIDES 18/8" MTL STUD i --35/8" MTL STUD 8" CMU RE A201 FOR EXTERIOR FINISHES ---4" MTL STUD 1� '1-6" MTL STUD 4" MTL STUD a Ti W L_ O .L C U U) L i-+ C Lo n, W N U O E 0 C/) i� i CCO G @ Co W Y � N IL M G m Z — my w N o o 0 _o L d C: c z L w U 0 ru W �_ U a Ti W L_ O .L C U U) L C 0 Q� U 75 0 i CCO G z o G m U) Z �y �1\'V�l 0-0 w N O o V U LL W a Ti W L_ O .L C U U) A402 0 0 z CL N O O Y W Z Y W U � N � S A402 I_E,1[0-N39t4-2W424_AW 1000-XVAM 8 2513A 1 Door & Frame Schedule DOORS FRAME DETAILS GLASS LOUVER DOOR & FRAME ASSEMBLY UL LABEL HARD- WARE SET REMARKS MARK TYPE WIDTH HT. THICK NESS MATERIAL TYPE MATERIAL HEAD JAMB SILL SIZE TYPE THICK NESS SIZE TYPE 0 M0jL 3=a 71-011 /q" ALUMINUM FR 2 ALUMINUM DH -I DJ -I DS 1 FULL TEMP O w US3 PBB1 tU •0O Z JU�OONBNNORE1 pBWEDOSDT-1 0 DT -3 3-0 8' 0" *4" WOOD FR -1 WOOD DH -4 DJ -4 DS -4 FULL TEMP �'A _ _ _ 2 2'-0" SIDELIGHT EACH SIDE AT SIM DT -2 3'-0" 6'-8" 1s/4" WOOD FR -1 WOOD DH -4 DJ -4 DS -4 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 HOLLOW CORE PREHUNG DOOR PAINT GRADE DT -3 3'-0" 8' 0" 1�/q" WOOD FR -1 WOOD DH -4 DJ -4 DS -4 FULL TEMP '/q - - - 4 0 DT 1 3' O" 3'-0.. 8 0' IN ALUMINUM FR -2 ALUMINUM DH -2 DJ -2 DS -1 FULL TEMP i /4 _ - - 1 FLUROPON "BONE WHITE" DJ -2 BETWEEN DOORS 0 DT -2 34" 6'-8" w WOOD FR -1 WOOD DH -4 DJ -4 DS -4 _ _ _ _ _ _ 5 HOLLOW CORE PREHUNG DOOR PAINT GRADE Hardware Group No. 01 RE RE RE: J�- Provide each PR door(s) with the following:y-- Model Number Finish Mfgr SCHEDULE SCHEDULE SCHEDULE Quantity Description �16E ¢ Q 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-1571CX 626 SCH O 1 EA BALANCE BY DOOR SUPPLIER ZLIo A302-7 1 EA EXIT DEVICE VENDOR INTEGRAL "TOUCH BAR PANIC"��LOCKING -r--i C/) PANIC BAR��Hardware SIM M0jL rn B.O. ROUGH OPENING / / 101'-8" A.F.F. Group No.02/�Provide each PR door(s) with the followings �,v Px N XiQuantity 14 a r` Description ModelNumber FinishMfgr//�6 O w US3 PBB1 tU •0O Z Co EA HINGE BB813.5 X 3.5 w 0 _0 m[L EA PASSAGE LATCH AL10S SAT 605 SCH (ACTIVE LEAF)2 605 SCH (INACTIVE LEAF) V L W EA DUMMY TRIM AL170 SAT a) 2 � / 2 EA LEVER EXTENSION FLUSH BOLT WITH HEAD AND FLOOR STEEL z _ - _ SLEEVE INSERTS 262 83 IVE (INACTIVE LEAF) ]G y 2 EA WALL STOP 230W-US3 HAG DT -1 DT -2 DT -3 Hardware Group No. 03 Provide each SINGLE door(s) with the following:Door Types Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfgr 3NTS N 6 EA HINGE BB813.5 X 3.5 US3 PBB 4 W 1 EA BATH/BEDROOM PRIVACY LOCK AL40S SAT 605 SCH � 2 EA DUMMY TRIM AL170 SAT 605 SCH (INACTIVE LEAF) 1 EA WALL STOP 230W US3 HAG � 4th, RE -4" x 11 2 1 y/ SCHEDULE N �y - SCHEDULE d _ U Hardware Group No. 04 - Provide each SINGLE door(s) with the following Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfgr 6 EA HINGE BB813.5 X 3.5 US3 PBB 1 EA PASSAGE LATCH AL40S SAT 605 SCH J 1 EA WALL STOP 23OW-US3 HAGEI o Hardware Group No. 05 w Provide each SINGLE door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number Finish Mfgr 6 EA HINGE BB81 3.5 X 3.5 US3 PBB 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD SAT 605 SCH IEA WALL STOP 230W-US3 HAG 2 Hardware Goups A302-6 SIM OL FINISH FLOOR 100'4" A.F.F. m O� 1 0 a , N C> � ¢ V (3)EQUAL SPACES 6'-D"- - -2" A302-7 (2)EQUAL SPACES LY SIM OL UN - 107'-4" A.F.F. A601 -6D �16E ¢ Q O U1 ZLIo A302-7 a -r--i C/) SIM M0jL rn B.O. ROUGH OPENING / / 101'-8" A.F.F. M o C 14 a r` O w ^, W tU •0O Z Co O w 0 _0 m[L o V L W SIM FINISH FLOOR �L—J'1 JJ 100-0" A.F.F. O 7 Storefront Types SCALE 1/4" • 1'-0" m 0 A302-6 SIM w Q V) N I a0 O 0 w M FR -1 FR -2 Frame Types 411TS 3'-4" � A301-2 A301-2 SIM SIM dk B.O. ROUGH OPENING / 113'-0" A.F.F. N N O �M cn Q V1¢ V1 �A302-6 SIM A302-7 SIM OL UN - FINISH FLOOR �L—J'1 JJ 100-0" A.F.F. O 7 Storefront Types SCALE 1/4" • 1'-0" m 0 A302-6 SIM w Q V) N I a0 O 0 w M FR -1 FR -2 Frame Types 411TS 3'-4" � A301-2 A301-2 SIM SIM dk B.O. ROUGH OPENING / 113'-0" A.F.F. N N O �M cn Q V1¢ V1 �A302-6 SIM A302-7 SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 107'-4" A.F.F. �I g'-8" ¢ Q U1 ZLIo A302-7 a -r--i C/) SIM M0jL rn B.O. ROUGH OPENING �CD It 101'-8" A.F.F. M C A302-6 SIM gik FINISH FLOOR A302-7 SIM DH -1 DH-3/DJ-3 DJ -1 DJ -2 DS -1 5Door Head / Jamb & Sill Details SCALE 3" = 1'-0" M N ¢ A302-7 SIM A302-7 SIM B.O.OL ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. O N O M Q (n --IO'-0" 10�—(3)EQUAL SPACES A302-6 SIM V w ¢ ff� A302-6 o SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. r N o g Q V) 7'-4" (2)EQUAL SPACES O 6'-8" (2)EQUAL SPACES m 100'-0" A.F.F. m ® o Q o � A302-7 NSIM w LZ N J I ¢ A302-7 v SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. A302-6 NSIM w n. N � J I Q o A302 4 SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. r N O � Q N _ 5'-4" (2)EQUAL SPACES RE A401 'r J, RE A401, DH-4/DJ-4 O a y - 7'-4" - �I (3) EQUAL SPACES 10 A302-7 •11L A 00 ACOUSTICAL BATTS WHERE OCCURS 1/2" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE OF MTL STUDS RE WALL TYPE SOLID WOOD DOOR FRAME, PAINT FINISH RE DOOR SCHEDULE FLUSH HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOOR RE DOOR SCHEDULE SOLID WOOD DOOR FRAME (BEYOND) FINISH FLOOR RE:FLOOR PLAN 5'-4" (2) EQUAL SPAC IF A60 ¢ d b ¢ r / in w N jjjB.O. ROUGH OPENING 114'-0" A.F.F. N , 0 a Q 8'-10" (3)EQUAL SPACES A601 -6D i I ASUZ-4 o'I SIM w o J� o A302-4 ¢ SIM B.O.1' 8" AGF OPENING I 10.F.F. 1 licit "Ell „B„ „D,1 6Miscellaneous Storefront Details SCALE:3" = T-0" OL FINISH FLOOR 100'-0" A.F.F. A302-4 J SIM /T V) / w o a N J A601 -6D 0 I N ¢ ED ED a / � g'-8" ¢ n A302-6 SIM V w ¢ ff� A302-6 o SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. r N o g Q V) 7'-4" (2)EQUAL SPACES O 6'-8" (2)EQUAL SPACES m 100'-0" A.F.F. m ® o Q o � A302-7 NSIM w LZ N J I ¢ A302-7 v SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. A302-6 NSIM w n. N � J I Q o A302 4 SIM OL B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. r N O � Q N _ 5'-4" (2)EQUAL SPACES RE A401 'r J, RE A401, DH-4/DJ-4 O a y - 7'-4" - �I (3) EQUAL SPACES 10 A302-7 •11L A 00 ACOUSTICAL BATTS WHERE OCCURS 1/2" GYP. BD. EACH SIDE OF MTL STUDS RE WALL TYPE SOLID WOOD DOOR FRAME, PAINT FINISH RE DOOR SCHEDULE FLUSH HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOOR RE DOOR SCHEDULE SOLID WOOD DOOR FRAME (BEYOND) FINISH FLOOR RE:FLOOR PLAN 5'-4" (2) EQUAL SPAC IF A60 ¢ d b ¢ r / in w N jjjB.O. ROUGH OPENING 114'-0" A.F.F. N , 0 a Q 8'-10" (3)EQUAL SPACES A601 -6D i I ASUZ-4 o'I SIM w o J� o A302-4 ¢ SIM B.O.1' 8" AGF OPENING I 10.F.F. 1 licit "Ell „B„ „D,1 6Miscellaneous Storefront Details SCALE:3" = T-0" OL FINISH FLOOR 100'-0" A.F.F. A302-4 J SIM /T V) / w o a N J a� (2)EQUAL SPACES 0 B.O. ROUGH OPENING ¢ 101'-8" A.F.F. I O a 12 SIM V] w n. N I A301-7 i N B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. O W-0" ¢ (2) EQUAL SPACES O a 0 I N I O � g'-8" ¢ n a� (2)EQUAL SPACES 0 B.O. ROUGH OPENING ¢ 101'-8" A.F.F. I O a 12 SIM V] w n. N I A301-7 i N B.O. ROUGH OPENING 101'-8" A.F.F. O W-0" ¢ (2) EQUAL SPACES O a W J' L 11 06 Cn W U 0 >0 w L F 0 0 ❑w 0 Q� I 1--� ❑ L r U1 7 -r--i C/) T rn C7C) G �CD It ` / M C a O w ^, W tU •0O Z Co O w 0 _0 m[L o V L W a) 2 � C o@ z CO W ]G y � W J' L 11 06 Cn W U 0 >0 w L F 0 0 ❑w 0 Q� I -q—r U1 I rn C7C) G z 1 Co o O w ^, W C (0 U) Z Co 0-0 w ffnn 0 o V U LL a m W J' L 11 06 Cn W U 0 >0 w L F 0 0 ❑w A601 0 0 W rn z z C. O p a. V m w N a O z ]G y � w O N 4 W � � x d N D U { A601 vim uviur al mates STRUCT 'DAL DESIGN CD'TER'A D-1 CODES: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2001 EDITION D-2 DESIGN LIVE LOADS: ROOF: 20 PSF. D-3 DESIGN WIND SPEED 110 MPH, 3—SEC. GUST BUILDING CATEGORY ii IMPORTANCE FACTOR (1)=1.00 EXPOSRURE C INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT (GCpi)=+/-0,18 NET JOIST UPLIFT 25 P �R PSF, WITHIN 5--6" OF IMETER) 20 PSF. (ELSE%"ERF) ZONED) D-4 SEISMIC: ZONE 0 D-5 ALLOWABLE SAiL BEARING PRESSURE 2000 PSF D-6 COMPONENTS AND CLADDING WIND PRESSURES COMPONENTS AND CLADD!NG: 31 2 13 21 , '2 I � i 21 I 3 2 13 ROOF PRESSURES PRESSURES IN P.S.F. 5 4 151 I WALL PRESSURES PRESSURES IN P.S.F. GENERAL NOTES G-1 REVIEW ALL PROJECT DOCUMEN S PRICK TO FABRICATION AND START OF CONSTRUCTION REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES TO AniHCCI. OR cJTiR.._CIVR nL ENGINEER.. PRIOR TO PROCEEDING wTH WORK. G-2 THE MASONRY WALLS ARE NOT DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION LOADS. — IS T^:E GGNTRACTOR$ RESPONSIBILITY AT ALL TIMES TO MAINTAIN WALL STABILITY DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASF OF THIS PROJECT - G -3 ET IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROTECT EXISTING FACILITIES, STRUCTURES AND UTILITY LINES FROM ALL DAMAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION, G-4 NO STRUCTURAL MEMBER SHALL BE CUT, NOTCHED OR OTHERWISE REDUCED IN SIZE OR STRENGTH WITHOUT PRIOR APPRUVAL IN 6P1�I TNG FROM THE STRUC711113A ENGINEER, G-5 I.00KDINATE STRUC1Tv'RAI AND OTHER DRAWINGS THAT ARE PART OF THE CONTACT DOCUMENTS FOR ANCHORED, EMBEDDED OR SUPPORTED ITEMS WHICH AFFECT THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. G-6 ALL DETAILS AND SECTIONS ON THE DRAWINGS ARE iNTENDED TO BE TYPICAL AND SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO APPLY TO ANY SIMILAR SITUATION E' SEWHERE ON THE PROJECT EXCEPT WHERE A SEPARATE DETAIL IS SHOWN. G-7 THE INTENTION OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY DETAILS TO CONSTRUCT A COMPLETE STRUCTURE. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDiNAIE THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITH ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES. 'WHEN SPECIFIC INFORMATION IS MISSING OR IS IN CONFLICT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE A SIMILAR DETAIL AND/OR THE ;TORE COSTLY •-1— OF CONT ICT. E O GHT Tn I E AIT, 1E r. Ir , n v GGNFrLiG1$ SHALL DE BROUGHT IV lilC AI ICIYZION VF ITIC ARCHITECT. -- -- -- - THE STRUCTURAL G-8 PHOTOGRAPHIC REPRODUCTIONS Or CHL J,,.JCTL.r\,,,_ DRAWINGS FOR SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED. i MA_.CE TH THE RAWIry • FOR C )NF WI-.. --._ —9 REVIEW ALL SHOP D... � _ � _.L_ CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FOR COMPLETENESS AND ANSWER ALL CONTRACTOR INELATED QUESTIONS. STAMP AND INITIAL ILL SHEETS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW, NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THIS REQUIREMENT WILL RESULT IN REJECTION OF SUBMITTAL. G-10 ALL WORK TO BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL. CODES. G-11 CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS & DIMENSIONS RELATIVE TO TrEE SAME. WHERE TriERE ARE CONFLICTS BETWEEN ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECT_/_ENGINEER'S ATTENTION AND NECESSARY ADJUSTMEI\Ta MADE PER THEIR HE COORDINATION. —12 IF THE ARE ANY niSCREPANGiES BETWEEN THF STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS, !\r C Il\Tl n T 1 L/ I SIRUGTURAL VETAILJ, STRUC URAL NOTES, 1,E PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS, OR APPLICABLE CODES THE STRICITEST SHALL GOVERN. G-13 ONLY WRITTEN CHANGES APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER SHALL BE PERMITTED. SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS SF -1 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTION OUTLINED IN THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FROM UNIVERSAL ENGINEERING SCIENCES, PROJECT No. 1 220313-004— 001, DATED 1/16/04, AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH LETTER DATED 3/4/04 SF -2 SOIL TO BE STRIPPED, COMPACTED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WiIH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE SOILS EivGENEERAND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. SF -3 CENTER ALL FOOTINGS UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE COLUMNS OR 'YVALLS UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON PLANS, MAXIMUM MISPLACEMENT OR ECCENTRICITY -2", TOLERANCE FOR MISLOCATiON OF COLUMN DOWELS OR ANCHOR BOLTS TO BE PER ACI OR AISC STANDARDS. SF -4 HORIZONTAL JOINTS IN FOOTINGS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. WHFRE VERTICAL CO`NSTRUCT`ION JOINTS OCCUR I` c `J CONTINUOUS FOOTINGS. PROVIDE A MINIMUM CONTINUOUS 2 x 4" KEY WAY ACROSS JOiNT FOR EACH 12" OF DEPTH. SF -6 CONTRACTOR TO NOIIFY ARCHT Ir CT IF SOIL CONDITIONS ARE UNCOVERED THAT PREVENT THE REQUIRED SOIL BEARING PRESSURE FROM BEING OBTAINED. 1 � Cn S WITH TING LOCATIONS r JR SF -7 COORDINATE PLUMBING UNE F00 INTERFACE. INDIVIDUAL FOOTINGS SHOULD BE LOWERED 'MTN !CIE PRIOR APPROVAL OF IHC STRUCTCIRAL ENGINEER, CONTINUOUS WALL FOOTINGS SHOULD BE STEPPED AS DETAILED ON DRAWINGS, E —PLAC — EXCAVATING UNDER OR NEAR IN E SF—B F FOOTINGS/FOUNDATIONS WHICH DISTURBS THE COMPACTED SOIL BENEATH THE FOOTINGVFOUNDATIONS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. SF -9 KFIAIF±JRCING SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON PRECAST GONCRFIF PADS, DOWELS FOR COLUMNS AND FILLED CELLS SHALL BE SECURED IN PLACE PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE. USE irLMPLATES FOR SETTING COLUMN' DOWELS AND ANCHOR BOLTS. — HALL NOT EXCEED A SLOPE OF i SF 10 STEPS IN WALL FOOTINGS E l ) VERTICAL TO (1) HORIZONTAL. SF -11 CAUTION SHALL BE USED WHEN OPERATING VIBRATORY COMPACTION EQUIPMENT NEAR EXISTING STRUCTURES TOO AVOID THE RISK OF DAMAGING THE EXISTING STRUCTURE. SF -12 ALL BACKFILL COMPACTION WORK ADJACENT TO RETAINING WALLS, FOUNDATION WALLS FTC. SHALL iiSF LIGHT DUTY HAND OPERATED TAMPERS WITHIN 3'-D" DISTANCE FROM THE WALL. SF -13 AT EXTERIOR CMU FOUNDATION WALLS, WHEN THE HEIGHT BETWEEN TOP OF SLAB AND FINISH GRADE IS GREATER THAN 3`—O" FOR A LENGTH OF 6'-0" OR MORE, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING OF WALL UNTIL 14 DAYS MINIMUM AFTER SLAB IS INSTALLED. REINFORCED CONCRETE — RC -1 ALL CONCRETE DESIGN PLACEMENT SHAIL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE ACi "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCREIc," ACI 318-95. RC -2 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 301 SPECIFICATIONS, ALL CONCRETE TYPE 1 PORTLAND CEMENT (ASTM C 150) 3000 psi TYPICAL I.O.N., 3500 PSI FOR ALL ELEVATED SI ADS AND 4000 psi FOR CONCRETE BEAMS & COLUMNS COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS (U.O.N.) SLUMP FOOTINGS 4" +/- i" COLUMNS 4" +/— 1" SLABS E BMS & TIE COLS 4" +/— 1" WATER: POTABLE CHLORIDE: NONE ATR CONTENT FOR 3500 PSI: A-7. +/_ I% RC -3 PROVIDE NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATES IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF AST": c,33. RC -4 USE D.O.T. CLASS 'Vii WEiG`r.T CONCRETE FOR AGGRESSI',it ENVIRONMENT RC -5 FLYASH WHEN USED, SHALL BE LIMITED TO 20% OF THE i,1CR'rNTiTOUS MATCLREAL. ,LiYl u . RC -6 ALL PUMPED CONCRETE WITH 957 AGGREGATE IS TO CONTAIN A HIGH RANGE WATER REDUCING AGENT. MINIMUM SIZE OF DISCHARGE TO BE4"I.D. FSC -7 A 2" E.Q. DISCHARGE MAY BE USED WITH #8 AGGREGATE. USE PLASTICIZER ADMIXTURE IF NECESSARY TO INCREASE SLUMPS BEYOND THAT NOTED ABOVE. RC -8 CHAMFER ALL EDGES OF EXPOSED CONCRETE 3/4" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. Dr ALL DCiRi ru.lr c C SHALL c CADDY ATCn — JIIALL BL DETAILED I nVl\IVIYILV f F('{Rc.lrvV JTELL 1\V s ILL 1\LI Y V AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318-95 AND ACE DETAILING MANUAL, ACI 315 1988 EDITION. RC -10 REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW DEFORMED BARS THAT ARE FREE FROM RUST, SCALE AND OIL AND CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRAD" 60, WITH MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH 60,000. WHERE WELDING REQUIRED ASTM A706, GRADE 60 RC -11 ALL SLABS ON GRADE SHALL BE REINFORCED WITH WELDED WIRE FABRIC AS SHOWN IN THE DRAWINGS. RC -12 WFI DFD WIRF FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-185. RC -13 LAP CONT. BOTTOM STEEL OVER SUPPORT AND CONT. TOP STEEL AT MID SPAN UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. MIN. LENGTH OF LAPPED SPLICES SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS UNLESS NOTED. STAGGER SPLICES SO THAT NO TWO ADJACENT BARS ARE SPLICED iN IHE SAME LOCATION UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL BE LAPPED ONE FULL MESH AT THE SIDES AND ONE FULL MESH PLUS 2" AT THE ENDS. MAKE ALL BARS CONTINUOUS AROUND CORNERS OF PROInDE CORNER BARS OF EQUAL SIZE AND SPACING. BAR SIZE: SPLICE SIZE: #3 16» #4 22" #5 27" #6 35" RC -14 TERMINATE ALL DISCONTINUOUS TOP BARS WITH STANDARD 90 DEGREE HOOK (PLACED VERTICALLY) UNLESS NOTED O THFRWISE. RC -15 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING CONCRETE COVERAGE'S OVER REINFORCING, BA. FOOTINGS & UNFORMED EDGES- 3" CUR. BEAMS &COLUMNS (TIES)- 1 1/2" CLR. SLABS (TOP & BOT. -STEEL) INILK!OR- 3/4" CLR. EXTERIOR— 1 1/2" CLR. CONC, WAULS— AS NOTED (1 1/2" CLR, MIN.) RC -16 SHOP DRAWINGS FOR PLACEMENT SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO REBAR FABRICATION. RC -17 SLEEVE ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH BEAMS AND SLABS INDIVIDUALLY CORE DRILLING WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. SUBMIT JCATION AND SIZE OF SLEEVES THROUGH BEAMS TO ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO CASTING CONCRETE. RG -18 NO REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE GUT TO ACCVMMvDATE THE INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS, EMBEDS OR OTHER ITEMS. RC -19 USE THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS INCLUDING REVISIONS AND ADDENDA IN CONJUNCTION WITH REVIEWED SHOP DRAWINGS FOR PLACEMENT OF RFINFORCING. RC -20 AT CHANGES IN DIRECTION OF CONCRETE WALLS, BEAMS & STRIP FOOTINGS, PROVIDE CORNER BARS OF SAME SIZE AND QUANT -11-Y (U.O.N.) AS HORIZONTAL ST -EEL. REFER TO TYPICAL DETAIL. RC -21 ALL EMBEDDED i—M-SHALL BE SECURELY TIED IN PLACE PRIOR. TO CONCRETE PLACEMIENT. RC -22 WEDGE BOLTS SHALL BE 11W RAMSF 1/REDHEAD BOLI VR APPROVED EQUIVALENT INS al 1-n IN ANCF � WITW MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. 3/4 DIAMETER WEDGE BDLTS SH ALU Bo EE OF 11rNG`H REQUIRED TO PROVIDE 3-1 f4" MIN, EMBEDMENT, —0 `KIPS :ENSIGN AND 4.1 KIPS SHEAR WORKING LOADS IN 3000psi CONCRETE (U.O.N.) DO NOT CUT EXISTING REINFORCING TO INSTALL, RC -23 DOWEL BAR SPLICERS SHALL BE A COMPLETE ASSEMBLY, INCLUDING IDING COUPLER, FRS FROM ATTACHMENT (WHEN REQUIRED) AND THREADED PAR ^_.APART F OF DEVELOPING THE BAR rl SPLICED CT BEING JPL.JED 1N ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318 SECTION 12.14.3. RC -24 HEADED STUD ANCHORS SHALL BE ASTM A 108, GRADE S, 1010 THROUGH 1020 AS MANUFACTURED BY NELSON STUD P PPROVEn FODRe O A EQUIVALENT. STUD WELDING HALL C PI 1\1,1 TO AWS D1.1 "STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE." RC -25 ADHESIVL ANCHORS SHALL BE ITW RAMSET/REDHEAD EPCON CERAMii- 5 EPDXY ANCHORING SYSTEM OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. A SCREEN TUBE MUST RF EiTTi E7FD- FOR INSTALLATION IN HOLLOW OW BL OCK AND BRICK MASONRY, DO NOT CUT EXISTING REINFORCING TM 6vSTALL RC -26 PLACE CONCRETE PER ACI 304. USE INTERNAL MECHANICAL VIBRATION FOR ALL CONCRETE. LIMIT MAXIMUM FREE FALL DROP OF CONCRETE TO 6'-0" FOR #57 AGGREGATE AND 8'-0" FOR #8 AGGREGATE. ALL PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID SEGREGATION OF CONCRETE DURING PLACEMENT. ,i — RC 27 PLACEMENT OF CONDUIT AND PIPES IN CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318, SECTION 6.3, RC -28 SLABS AND GRADE BEAMS SHALL NOT HAVE JOINTS IN A HORIZONTAL PLANE. Ali REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE rnRlm Rll In] is Ill D,ni Irl! At 1 nnAISTRIIGTIOR.f InIMTC VVi11111V VVJ 111\VV VII LL VVIYJi ! VVIIYIJ. RC -29 PROVIDE (2) #5 BARS WITH 3'-0" PROJECTION ON ALL SIDES AIF' Al Q!-'FNi�iG$ DR RE—ENTRANT CORNERS IN CONCRETE LAACM&1171V I MOVIYn I M-1 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ACI "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES" (ACI/ASCE Szn) Amn -,rPFR!I riP1CATIONS FOR MASONRY ETCT! RES" (ACI/ASCE 530,1) EXCEPT AS AMENDED BELOW. M-2 CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN COPY OF MASONRY CODE AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFERENCE AT THE JOBSITE. M-3 STRUCTURE HAS BEEN DESIGNED AS AM SEARING WALL STRUCTURE. ALL MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE LAID PRIOR T— O CONCRETE PLACEMENT OF COLUMNS, BEAMS AND SLABS FOR THE SAME STORY M-4 USE TYPE "S" MORTAR WITH MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 1I800psT. IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C270 M-5 MASONRY UNITS SHR__ r_ ONFORM TO ASTM C90 GRADE h I TIWrA MINIMUM ^OMPRESSI'vEG STRENGTH TH OF i900p5i ON NET SECTION TO PROVIDE NET AREA COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY (F'm) OF 1500psi., LAID IN RUNNING BOND. M-6 PROVIDE FiLLED CELLS AS SHOWN' ON PLANS. IN ADDITION, PROVIDE FILLED CELLS W/ (1) #5 VERTICAL ADJACENT TO ALL OPENINGS, AND AT ANCHORAGE OF CONNECTIONS. M-7 PROVIDE FULL MORTAR BEDDING AROUND ALL FILLED CELLS WITH VERTICAL REINFORCING. M 25 REINFORCING FOR �LL tD CELLS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING LAP SPLICES FOR REINFORCING. r SIZE: , r• BAR SIZE: SPLICE JIZG. #4 24" #5 3O" 36 M-9 ALL GILLED CELLS AND COLUMNS SHALL BEPOURED ' AT I FAST TWO (9) HOURS PRIOR T" POURING BEAMS AND LINTELS. M-10 REINFORCING WALL WITH LADDER TYPE REINFORCE"Y�ENT ("DUR—O—WALL" OR EQUAL) IN BED JOINTS AT 16' O.C. MEASURED VERTICALLY. LAP SPLICE ALL HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING 6", PROVIDE PREFABRICATED "TEE" OR CORNET{ SECTIONS AT ALL INTERSECTING WALLS. M-11 REFER TO TYPICAL WALL SECTIONS FOR MAXIMUM CONSTRUCTION HEIGHT OF MASONRY WALLS. PROVIDE CLEAN—OUT HOLES AT BASE OF FILLED CELLS WHEN THE CONCRETE POUR EXCEEDS 5 FEET IN HEIGHT. M-12 CONCRETE FOR FILLED CELLS SHALL BE VIBRATED DURING PLACEMENT USiNG A "PENCIL" TYPE VBRATOR. M-13 THE TYPICAL LINTELS OVER OPENINGS IN THE WALL SHALL HAVE (2) #5 BARS FOR 2 COURSES ABOVE OPENING FILLED SOLID UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING LINTELS OVER ALL MASONRY WALL OPENINGS. —PROVIDE MINIMUM END BEARING OF 8". CUT OUT BOTTOM OF LINTEL AT END TO ALLOW CONTINUATION OF FILLED CELL REINFORCING. M-15 PROVIDE (2) #5 CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL IN KNOCK—OUT BLOCK BELOW ALL WINDOW SILLS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. M-16 PROVIDE VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT IN 3000psi GROUT FiLLED CMU CELL FROM FOOTING TO BEAM AT. TOP OF WALL AS FOLLOWS: 12" CMU -(1) #5 VERTICAL AT 32" O -C. 8" CMU -(1) #5 VERTICAL AT 16" O.C. (2) HOREZ TIAL BAR Ai S'-0" vv. C. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT 16" D.C. M-17 CMU CELL$ I".DILATED IN PLAN OR NOTES AS FILLED CELLS 5LALL BE GROUTED SOLID WITH 3000 psi CONCRETE GROUT i8 TO 1v SLUMPS. M-18 SUBMIT REBAR PLACING SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW, ALSO INCLUDE LOCATION OF MASONRY CONTROL JOiNTS. M-19 REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW DEFORMED BARS THAT ARE FREE FROM RUST, SCALE AND OIL AND CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADF 60, WITH MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH = 60,000. WHERE WELDING REQUIRED ASTM A706, GRADE 60 M-20 A MINIMUM OF (3) FILLED CELLS SHALL BE LOCATED AT CONCEN MAitD LOADS ON TYPICAL WALLS. M-21 PROVIDE (3) FILLED CELLS AT ALL CORNERS AND ENDS OF WALLS. M-22 LAP ALL BOND BEAMS WHERE STEPPED 4'-0"- M-23 ALL DOWELS FROM THE FOUNDATION SHALL MATCHS IZE & LOCAIION OF THE VERTICAL REINFORCING IN MASONRY, UNLESS FSS N TF FFERENTI Y EXTEND DOWEL A MIN OF ' BAR DIAMETERS FROM THE FOUNDATION. .f EXPANSION BOO ram SHALL nr '1-111_1, 1/ s V M -2Y Lnrn:YJIVN DVLIJ JrnLL DG it IN IN BOLT Ii OR EQUAL. APPROVED _QU.._. MINIMUM EMBED SHALL BE 5 FOR 4 i" i" t" 5 1 1 z C Ole � t FnR t nIe eMn DrA., ., � FOR � ., , .,,. ,o �,,.. ...,, 2 .6 FOR Ax-- DIA t, nc r EMICAL ;HORS SHALL BE "HILA C-100" DR APPRO`vlu kAna iffL EQUAL. MINIMUM EMBEDMENT SHAL BE 6 s" FOR ala" DIA., 4 1/a" FOR 1h" DIA., 3 16" FOR 34" DIA. M-26 THREADED ANCHORS SHALL BE ASTM A36 OR A307 QUALITY, ALL CMU CELLS TO RECEIVE ANCHORS SHALL BE GROUTED ENGINEER NOTIFY SOI D. PR T SITUTEON OF ANY L EE TOR O SUB BOLTS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. STRUCTURAL STEEL S-1 yABRICAiION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE AISC "MANUAL OF STRUCTURAL GONSKUCTON NINTH Fni?!ON AND THE A.LSC "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDDIivGS," MS; Euniiviv. S-2 STEEL DESIGNATIONS: N"DE I LA"inrc .ASTM A992 F y-501 .s I ALL OTHER ROLLED SHAPES AND PLATES ASTM A. -i6 Fv_AFik s i PIPE COLUMN....................... ASTM A53, GRADE B Fy--36k sJ STRUCTURAL TUBING........ ASTM A500, GRADE B Fy--46k.s.i S-3 ALL HIGH—SiiRENGTH BOLTS SHALL MEE i THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS." S-4 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL BOLTS SHALL BE 3/4" DIAMETER A-325 AND SHALL BE BEARING TYPE CONNECTIONS. IF A CERTAIN SITUATION IS NOT DETAILED USE A S's"dIALAR DETAIL CONNECT DR'S SHALL GENERALLY FOLLOW THE TYPES SHOWN IN AISC MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. S-5 USE MiN. 3/4" A -325F BOLTS WITH CLASS A CONTACT SURFACE FOR SLIP CRITICAL CONNEC GINS AS DESIGNATED ON PLANS BY A-325 S.C. S-6 ALL BOLTS CAST IN CONCRETE SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-36 OR A-307_ S-7 ALL SHOP AND FIELD WELDING SHALL BE DONE BY CURRENTLY CERTIFIED WELDERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS DLI "S IRU; IUKAL WELDING CODE,- LA IES I EDITION. S-8 ALL a"TEEMS ARE TO CONFORM TO niSC $TAirvARUS Ai3u LOAD TABLES. USE E70XX ELECTRODES FOR ALL WELDING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE GRIND SMOOTH ALL EXPOSED WELDS. S-9 SUBMIT STRUCTURAL STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRi CA iIVN. CLEARLY SHOW ALL PIECE DARKS, CONNFCTinNS ANTI EPEC_ ­DOM DRAWINGS. ANY SPI ICES NOT SHOWN ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS ARE TO BE CLEARLY R -_DIED FOR APPROVAL. I S-10 DO NOT WELD TO EMBEDS UNTIL CONCRETE HAS CURED AT LEAST 72 HOURS. USE APPROPRIATE WELDING PROCESSES TO Ui;SIT HEAT BUILDUP IN EMBED TO AVOID PLATE EXPANSION AND CRACKING OF CONCRETE. 5-11 WELDED CONNECTIONS SHALL DEVtL}P THE FULL SHEAR AND/OR MOMENT CAPACITY OF THE MEMBERS CONNECTED AS PER AISC. S-12 ALL BOLTED STEEL CONNECTIONS ARE TO BE STANDARD AISC BOLTED CONNECTIONS AS PER THE AISC MANUAL AND SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE n, nr 0Anc c nr TrnMIA, rn r IHE Tx ra -r DNI RIVI CLAM LVAiVJ, AJ VCICRMIIVCV F VM IiIL InOLCJ OF UNiFROM LOAD CONSTANTS OF THE AISC MANUAL. ALL BULTS SHALL BE STRENGTH ASTM A325, COLD FORMED STEEL (METAL STUDS) cc� n MS -1 ALL -J'1UD5 HND/VR JOISTS AI`I3J Ai.I.F$SORICJ SHALL DC OF THE TYPE, SiZE, GAUGE AND SPACING AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS DR TABLES. MS -2 ALL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTTTU LLTE SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN OF CM r FORMED STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS, LATEST EDITION. MS -3 ALL FRAMING MEMBERS SHALL BE FORMED FROM CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL. CORRESPONDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM A-446 WITH A MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 4D ksi FOR SJ AND CJ STYLE STUDS AND 33 ksI FOR CR RUNNERS. (U.S.G. OR EQUIVALENT). MS -4 FASTENING OF COMPONENTS SHALL BE WITH SELF DR!LL ING SCREWS OF SUFFICIENT ",1111 BER AND SPACING TO DEVELOP THE FULL DESIGN CAPACITY OF THE CONNECTED MEMBERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 'ALTRI TYING OF COMPONENTSSHALL NOT BE`PERMiI3}D- MS-5 PROVIDE HORIZON TIAL STRAP BRIDGING 1?¢"x20 GAUGE AT 48" O.C., SUPPLEMENTED BY SOLID BRIDGING AT 8'-0" O.C. MINIMUM AND AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. MS -6 SUBMIT PRF—ENGINEERED METAL STUD TRUSSES DRAWINGS & CALCULATIONS SIGNED AND SFAL FD RY AN ENGINEERED REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA. TOP & BOTTOM CHORDS SHALL BE 18 GA. MIN. SPECIALI TTY ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS; SE -1 STEEL PAN STAIRS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE FADDIrA Tn"S SPECIALITY ENGINEER A".D SHALL INC°LODE VI\IVrt 1 VI\J STRINGERS, TREADS,, HAND RAILING, GUARD RAiLS, PLATFORMS (AS REUIRED), PAN INSERTS, AND MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS AND CONNECTIONS. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND MUST nr SIGNED A STRUCTURAL T ACTT In AI ENGINEER DG JlvrvL AND SEALED BY _ JRvte lvnnL Llvvnvccin IN THE SAME STATE A- THE PROJECT I_ UATIviv. MINIMUM DESIGN LIVE LOAD SHALL BE 100 PSF, SE -2 HANDRAILS, POSTS :ID SUPPORT CONNECTIONS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE FABRICATORS SPECIALITY ENGINEER. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BF SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND MUST BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. DESIGN LOADING(S) SHALL CONFORM TO ALL REQUIREMENTS FO THE BUILDING CODE (SEE GENERAL NOTES FOR APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE), SE -3 EXTERIOR CURTAIN WALLS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE YtNDORS SPECIALITY ENGINEER AND SHALL INCLUDE FRAME, GLASS, GLAZING AND CONNECTIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND MUST RE SIGNED AND SFALLU BY A STRUi•TIiRai ENGIN'rER T REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. DESIGN LVAuiiJitS1 SHALLCOvFORM TO .ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE BUILDING CODE (SEE GENERAL NOTES FOR APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE). VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE WINDOW WALL REACTIONS TO THE AP,CHITECT. —4 AWNINGS S ' ' SE FALL BE DESIGNED BY THE FABRICATORS SPECIALITY FNQNFFR AND SHAI I INCI IIDF FRA COVERING, AND CONNECTIONS. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL L BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND MUST BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A STRUCTURAL ENGINEER REGISTERED iN THE SAME STATE AS THE PROJECT LOCATION. DESIGN i T _ LOADINGS SF1A_L L:,ONFGK&1 .0 ALL Kt"'UiRtMENTS OF ( ) V THE BUILDING CODE (SEE GENERAL NOTES FOR APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE). T 1 Fn R SE -5 ALL LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING SHALL BE DESIGN _Y A SPECIALITY ENGINEER -IND SHALL INCLUDE FRAME, COVERING AND GO"'NEC IONS. SHUT' UKANNGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND MUST BE SIGNED AND SEALED BY A STRUCTeJRAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE SAME STATF AS THF PROJFCT I OCATIOW rivOD W-1 DO NOT SPLICE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS BETWEEN SUPPORTS. W-2 ALL MEMBERS SIZES IN CONCEALED FRAMING ARE TO BE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM PROPERTIES: MEMBER SPECIES F13(ksi) E (ksi) POSTS SO. PINE NO.2 1.5 1,600 BEAMS SO, PINE NO.2 1.2 1,600 JOISTS SO- PiNE N0,2 1.25 1,600 STUDS a0, PiNE NO.2 1.5 1,600 W-3 ALL FRAMING 1N EXPOSED AREAS SHALL BE AS NOTED ON PLANS (AS MIN. $IZE REQUIRED TRUE ORALLY) COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS. W-4 ALI- WOOD IN COAITAa_.TPA4T I CON= -RE TE OR MASONRY SHALL BE PRESSURE TREATED. .F-5 ALL BOLTS FOR _u1_InO CvIvN€CT ON$ SHALL Cui.FORM TO ASTM A-307. W-6 'USE WASHERS BLTYYI=E3v' WOOD AND ALL BOLT LEADS AND NUTS. W-7 ALL METAL WOOD CONNErTnRS cHAt1 BE GALVANIZED AND SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY SIMPSON STRONG TIE CO. OR APPROVED EQUAL. W-8 ALL JOISTS SHALL BE LATERALLY SUPPORTED AT ENDS BY SOLID BLOCKING. W-9 STUD WALLS SHALL BE 2 x 4 0 16" O.C. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL BLOCKING IN STUD WALLS AT MIDPOINT, (U.O.N.) W -1v UNLESS NOTED OvTHERtYLISE OIv PLAN, PROVIDE UWUBLE STUDS AT ALL JAMBS OF OPENINGS UP TO 6'-0". USE TRIPLE STUDS FOR OPENINGS GREATER THAN 6'-0" AND LESS THAN 10'-0 W-11 WHERE BEAMS OR COLUMNS ARE FORMED OF TWO (2) OR MORE MEMBERS, THEY SHALL BE FULL LENGin AND FASTENED TOGETHER PER CHAPTER 93 OF - THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. W-12 HORIZONTAL LAMINATED MEMBERS SHALL CONFORM TO RITC 117 HAVE WET—USE ADHESIVE, 1E_NSION ZONE REQUIREMENTS TOP AND SO TO AD: Fb = 2200 psi FY = 200 psi F = 1.4Dv,vvv psl Fc) = 560 psi si W-13 CONNECTORS FOR EXPOSED WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE MADE OUT OF STEEL PLATES, COORDINATE FINISHES WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. W-14 ALL WOOD FRAMING SHALL BE DESIGNED, DETAILED AND, FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS OUTLINED IN THE LATEST tDITIVN OF THE NATIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS FOR WOOD CONSTRUCTION. FOR STRUCTURAL LUMBER, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING GRADE AND SPECIES (FnIIIVALFNT OR BETTER; U.O.N.: SOUTHERN PINE OR SPRUCE PINE FIR SURFACES DRY USED AT 19% MAX. M.C. GRADE NO. 2. W-15 ALL Wtsfnn FRAMING IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH MASONRY OR CONCRETE TO BE PRESSURE TREATED, THE USE OF SEAT PI ATE I LIEU F PRE 1 YR Tnr A 7 METAL SEA . N O. E 5 RE TRE WOOD IS ACCEPTABLE. W-16 PROVIDE GALVANIZED METAL HANGERS AND FRAMING ANrwnRS F TYPE AS SHOWN IN • FC OF THE SIZE AND ._ Ti-i,_,.E DOCUMENTS, CONNECT AS PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. (SIMPSON STRONG TIF OR EQUIVALFNT) W-17 PROVIDE FRAMING MEMBERS OF SIZES AND OF SPACING SHOWN, OR IF NOT SHOWN, COMPLY WiTH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE, LATEST EDIIION. W-18 5/8 " APA RATED STRUCT I EXT. PLYWOOD SHEATHING. NAILING PATTERNS ARE AS FOLLOWS- I BLOCKED DIAPHRAM 10d NAILS AT 6" O.C.(EDGES) AND 8" O.C,(FIELD) REST OF ROOF 10d NAILS AT 4" O.C.(EDGES) AND 6" O.C.(FTELD) De initions of Auureviationp A.B- ANCHOR BOLT ABV: ABOVE ACI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE ARCH. ARCHED OR ARCHITECT ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS BLW, Oct n . BM BEAM B.0_ Bu I II OM uF R(-jT, ROTTOM BRC. BEARING C.J. CONTROL JOINT CLR. CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL. COLUMN COPIC COO:^RETE CONN. CONNECTION CONT_._ CONTINUUS O CUR, COVER- DIA. DIAMETER D f_. DETAIL DWG, DRAWING E9. EACH E.J. EXPANSION JOINT EL. ELEVATION jo D EMBEDMENTEwu lt EXP. EXPOSURE 0D,. EXPANSION FF FINISHED FLOOR FL'F• FINISHED r--- ELEVATTU"e- FG FINISHED GRADE t- rCre . -.r.. ..,E STRENGTH ArtAJ_NR. _Sa:PR�SSIV_ _.icENvTH - FNG, ruuN IA ON FRM FRAMING CTG. FOOTING GA GAUGE G.C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR H.0 -A- HEADED CONCRETE ANGHUR ',H P17, HC:R17nNTAI H.S. HEADED STUD IN iNCH(ES) INT. INTERIOR J.B. JOIS T BEAKING J.G. JOIST GIRDER SST. JOIST JT JOIN 1 L ANGLE MAX. nAxIMIvM M/v "AMT\1RE CONTENT M-C.J. MASONRY CONTROL JOINT MFn. MANUFACIIURER MIN_ MINIMUM Misc. MISCELLANEOUS MPH MILES PER HOUR Iv TL METAL NO. NUMBER NS.&FS. NEAR SIDE AND FAR SIDE N T C_ NOT TO SCALE e D.C. ON CENTER ; OHGD OVERHEAD GARAGE DOOR OPG. OPENING OSB USB ORIENTED TF STRAND - - - vRIEN.tL STRAND BOARD P.C.L. PRE—CAST LINTEL P,D.F, POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS j P,E.M.T. PRE—ENGINEERED METAL TRUSSES P.E.W.T. PRE—ENGINEERED WOOD TRUSSES ; PL PLATE DSC 1 I POUNDS DCO SQUARE CnnT - I VVI VJ 1 Ln SQUARE 1 VV 1 PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH P.T. PRESSURE TREA7tn I kJIY QUANTITY REINF. REINFORCEMENT REOTD REQUIRED e RMD ROOF METAL DECK SPF SPRUCE PINE FiR = STL STEEL STRUCT. STRUCTURAL SUBST. SUBSTITUTE SYP SOUTHERN YELLOW PINE T.&S- TOP AND BOTTOM T.O. TOP OF TOF TOP OF FOOTING TOS f TOP OF SLAB —is i TUBE JlttL i EYP. TYPICAL � U,N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 1 SICOT vcn 1. t/CDTIr AI vLn n1.nL W / NTH Wi W/C WATFR CEMENT WWF - WIRE FABRIC WtUUt.. ED ...,.� . ,,....r.. 4 1 1 I_7 1 ILPLi� - 17 w i- N ' W ' � L L7 M s I_q U. co . 1 1 i a)N CD � CL a t i Q) �.,�c) NtY �QQNo I ?iG a' V t9 I it 1 CN ( I � LL =i N 0 Y= it I f y Cc - n 3it I E � 4) O .-• L. !I 11 Lill! L I i Iw IJ w i I i � I I jI I AN I I I � I I F 0 ` CIO d i q,�i�� 4V I 1 17 1 f. V _ II Vl 1O lu I I � d O M[ O N m t N •M( aa�4 N • C U 1.0 s { I II f i � i I I I I I 1 1 i II I J 1 I I i i i I ISI i 0�1 lai -I—I-I- 1 i I I w le 1� m I I s.Ai v rN I ■■■■ FOUNE)ATlv�i SCHEDUL E { MARK TYPE S17F i ! ! ; DEPTH REINFORCEMENT BASE PL/CL!P TYPES I TE -1.0 111 ❑ h' 11-0" CONT. 12" 1 (2) *5 CONT. --- I I WF -2.0 1 C.. t2' -O" CONT. J <r 12" [ (2) -5 CONT. W/°5 AT 16" o.c. --- I LLJ X OD _~� 1_. w ' i WF -2.5 1 IL' -Ci" CONT. Q � 12" (3) "5 CONT. 9Vf•5 ,4T 1b" O.C. -- WF- WF -3.0 � 1 ;..4 V 1{3'-0" CONT. E. 12" (3) *5 CONT. W1 AT 16" o.c. --- co cq Ix I Y .. , 6 � /sem 1 1 I ° F-3.0 ' If icojr 3'-0' 13'-6': SQUARE ' 12" (3) -5 E. W. BOT. --- F-3.5 i I I SQUARE L 1N 12" (4) *5 F.W. BOT. { --- mo It +n 1✓ 00 W 1Orin I F-4 v 1 1 %t Idi_ry �QUeaE 1 IT' (4) •5 E.W. T.&B. I i TF -5.0 V c 15'-0" SQUARE L V 1 �I i 12" (5) •5 E.W. BOT. HTT16 �S +f) TF -6.t 1 _ 65 ',., -3"" SQUARE 1 ti" I (6) •5 E.W, AOT. HTT22 FOOTING TYPES: 1 ti 1 - cnk[71 NUnus 1 1 1 11- CMU OR GIP CONC. PILASTER { II!- THICKENED EDGE !V- STEEL COLUMN PAD ! BASE PLATE TYPES: v ! 1 CD I = y'4"X12"x12" W/ (4) y4" DIA, ANCHOR -BOLTS (14"x4") HOLD DOWN TYPES: I ] 1 SIMPSON H T T16 W/%" DIA. THIRD. ROD EPDXY GROUTED INTn CONC. W/ 8" MIN. EMBEDMENT F SIMPSOs`v HTT22 W/5, /a" DIA_ THIRD. ROD EPDXY GROUTED i '0 c INTO CONC_ W/ 8" MIN. EMBEDMENT ff 8.9 / B•5 Ew A m 52 011 All 7'_411 171.41, 1 5,_4" 6''0'° 10'-81: 11_4" g �y trz_ 2'_011 i % i C+,��s 14A i l T I QI 1 1 ZD Ile I fi.i i I I .'��� TYP_ RE -ENT RANT CORNER SEE- a�— I 114"/S202 TYP. U.O.N. 2 4RA IlI T.O.FTG.--32" Rg% 1 i ao! 1 I 11 1 \ _ t:_ vI I .CIX tom^___________________________y, _-_--___________ ______--_--_-- a. I +i I P.C.L. I_11i� e i 1 PROVIDE PRE -CAST LINTEL OVER OPG. I isl i T,011T13.-_3 'I I � 1 SFr SHrET 5201 1 K TYP U.Q.N. I I I o i I= N iii----------SIMPSiUN_3iTT16__WZY8'--DL4 q - .J: --------n --------------------------- ---------- THRD. RO'J'' EPDXY GROUTED, a ! ! G� INTO CONC. W/ B" MIN. EMBEDMINI T(T`r`P. POST TO viY _i 1 I FOOTING CONNEC I JON —� i 6°6 I U.O.N.) 1 �1/ fL f I < I o S+'mr SON n o T122 W/%" DIA.- q �y'v :! 1 aoi �� mI j 1 ti v THRD. ROq EPDXY GROUTED —11 INTO C0.^;C. W/ 811 MIN. a:1 EMBEDMENT , —I a � 1 ! i E* ---=-------- ----------- ) c, --------- - i V T__TAFTG.--3211 iu+i t I I j M 't y j 1" DEEP SAW CUTS TCx BE MADE .- I Wiit v h> WITHIN 24 HRS OF POUR. AS PER IL� SPECIFICATIONS WWF SHALL \ — BE BE AT AL CONTROL 1 �a iP.0 I \' Jv!NTS(T I P. C.J. U.O.N.) it 1c1c as _sa I SEE "B"/S201 h �' 1 I I i . 1 I RAtAi� 4" CONCRETE SLAB W/ 3000 PSICONC.-1 d W/ 6X6 W`I.4xW1.4 WWF- OVER 6 MIN i VAPOR BARRIER ON T�RMITE TREATED ! ; I WELL COMPACTED SOIL. (TYP. U.O.N.) !zi —� -- Al c0 { 1r v T i I ' 2 I tt 1C3 11 12i 1 i 3 It 1_O" i 71_4" \ 8 6 -v v -8 c -4°' 12 r 141-4" 12'-4" 1T-4" ( 471-0" 1 Foundation Plan SCALE 1/8" = 1'-0" 2.3) 12.5 1 - DENOTES (1) •5 REBAR VERT. IN 8" CMU CELL FILLED W/ 3000 PS! CONC. CONT INUOUS FROM 8" HOOK IN FTG. TO 8'5 HOOK IN BM. AT T/WALL (TYP. AS SHOWN IN PLAIN & AT T-4" O C. AMD AS R E 0 1 D !N S T RUC T URAL NOTES) (NOT ALL SHOWN FOR CLARI I Y) T.O.FTG.--24" PROVIDE (2) F.C. EA. JAMB TYP.(U.O.N.) DENOTES (1) •5 REBAR VERT IN 12" CMU CELL FILLED W/ 3000 PSI CONC CONTINUOUS FROM 8" HOOK W FTG- TO 8 HOOK IN BM. AT T'WALL F YP. AS SHOWN IN PLAN' &• AT 2'-S" O.C. AND AS REO'D IN STRUCTURAL N=nTES) (NOT AL: SHOWN FOR CLARITY) i Rnn# Gr minq Dian 7 1 IILA 11 i .,wniE I;a %" APA RATED STRUCT 1 EXT PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 4" O.C.(EDGES) AND 61, O.C.(FIEL D) 5/n_" APPA RATED STRUCT ! EXT PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 6" O.C.(EDGES) AND 8" O.C.(FIELD) DESIGN TRUSSES FOR RTU WEIGHT. 5/" APA RATED S F?11CT 1 EXT PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 411 O.C.(EDGES) AND 6" O_C.(F!ELu) i h' C.. J <r 3 LLJ X OD _~� w ((( !I Q (3 10 U2 ' © O cd ;..4 V ILL j E. a co cq Ix u Y .. , 6 � /sem i 3 LLJ X OD _~� ((( !I 10 U2 ' © O j co cq Ix - i on �? icojr av (1)='= L 1N i 11 I mo It +n 1✓ 00 W 1Orin 0 L l� I I I' 1� c ��'. L V 1 �I �S +f) 65 W 1 1 ti v 1 CD 0 ] 1 (n F '0 c { z cc 1 I Imo= v UJ t� 3 � 3 r, mac€ N o i Q uia' � 1 ui 1 L- { i 1 ! I 1 : 1 wl I—I I i —I— i5;�1 In; �lu•,i:r, nIw I Iz f < Is Vo I Vol Irv, 1 WALL AND FTG. VT. REBAR IN CMU CELL FILLED W/ 3000psi CONC. AS REQ'D. IN PLANS OT ST RUC T . NOTES _ b i�t SEE PLAN AND FTC_ �SCHEDULE FOR SIZE, 1 Dt TH AND E!NF. RFQID.IN FTCS, � �i } f SIS CL R. COV, (TYP.) Type "I" rooting PLAN AND SCHEDULE 1 SIZE, DEPTH 3 REINF. REITE FTGS. 0 U COLUMN AND FTG. 2'-0" j i • e M• FQ PH � (:OI iiMN AND F-111 I 1 � SEE COL_ SECTIONS It/ AND PLANS FOR i C Oi TYPE, SIZE AND l F REINF. I f 5"/4"x7" PSL COLUMN !f_-1 PRE -MOULDED /z � ( `i g•►:it rJF FTy. BLW. DOWELS O kAATi"U $V VT. REINF— TSdi"AND „- QT=.. T'r. (2) TIES i yp� "I"' Footing 3-10,1110. k COV. (TYP•) 1 � • � rz / J / I L SIZE SEE PLAN AND FTG. SCHEDULE FOR SIZE, DEPTH AND REINF.. REQ'D. Type "IIIo" Footin - SIZE SEE PLAN AND FTG. SCHEDULE FOR SIZE, DEPTH AND REINF. REQ'D. l ype '`iilb" Footing I c•rr rn- uln xT,nu C �« r uurvvn I Iuly �, 2'-0" j i • e M• FQ PH � (:OI iiMN AND F-111 CLDi LININ AND FTG. !PLAN FOR COL, SIZE AND TYPE ! YPi ,\ CLR. 18�r i a5 CONT (2) COAT STEEL W/ i a ! I ASPHALTIC COAT !NG I f 5"/4"x7" PSL COLUMN !f_-1 PRE -MOULDED /z � ( `i g•►:it rJF FTy. BLW. :I i 1 Air (TYP-_} BE� a°W GR O� EXPANSION JOINT C v1 ' 1� I A 'COL. AND AROt IND C O _ (TYP t �„ MIN. CONT, rnVFR IFOR H =5 CONT. I VERT. REBAR I F RAS_ PI ATE ISIMPSON HT -116 OR BASE PLATE AND, `� - 1 i COL. BELOW GRADE I HTT22 W/%" DIA. !ANCHOR BOLT 3 �.fi I THRD.ROD EPDXY SEE _ T G, SCHEDULE \ 3- t / i CROU T ED INTO QJ i�� (2) +5 CONT, VERT. t14 i ,CONC. W1 s" MiN. ;"', m .r. V EMBEDMENT 1MENT C> (2) CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi 00 I 0 1/ 2" NON -SHRINK (2) =5 CONT. I CONC. AND Wti`/ (4) +6 VERTICAL (3) CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi 3000psi GROUT (5> CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi II�iJt TIES AT I ! ` - i ( } 'I I. 6" O.C. I VERT_ REBAR (2) IN Eal H CML I (IFI i {EXTEND ALL VERT- REINF. FROM CONC. AND W/ (6) a6 VERTICAL CONC. AND W/ (8) =6 VERTICAL All I 1i Ii (2) +5 CONT. VERT_ Z ^nor nD r s 8'' HOOK IN FTG. DNC. BEA1, 1 r2l I"' EACH CMU CELL kcs -,Y !! • . J .. L 3 i.,.l / i I I SIZE (FX ---- At L VERT. REINF. FROM f (Fa TEND ALL VERT, RFINF, FROM J ILI SEE PLAN AND FTG. i I 4_ 3"CLRj S!SCHEDULE FOR SIZE, 811 HOOK IN FTG. TO 8" HOOK IN BOTTOM 13EDTU ARE:I I{CIAiC DCnln - evvu z L -r Ye ,kLIK u. BEAi•,<1 AT T/WALL TYP.) BEAM AT T/WALL TYP.) SIZE Cu'v. t (TYP.} Type "W" i'.. �. Footiriy 11 11 Type roo1� I I 11_41- €A- XZi .:,. 2'-0" j i • e M• FQ PH I 2'-8" i 2'-0" Ii • ' • r-; s ` (TYP) ! YPi ,\ CLR. 18�r i a5 CONT (2) • p s a FA ��J�yj �cOl - `F-• L -e I a ! _O 181NOM. VERT.REBAR TOP iI/it I1 ( `i g•►:it rJF FTy. BLW. t^u npu 1 -� O5F1 FTG, BLW. .I OF GIRDER ABV, C v1 ii I A 'COL. AND AND COL. I'V V I � _ 'G BIL'. AND COL. 1 1 V. VLff. V - -� c NT. 40 =5 CONT. I VERT. REBAR I F Dr AD D -. - . nl-frYk TO- tl) I 3 CC ce) Nj () C AT I 3- e6 td QJ i�� (2) +5 CONT, VERT. �� All C3 ;"', m .r. V REBAR MIDDLE C> (2) CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi 00 I 0 �� I! =3 (2) =5 CONT. I CONC. AND Wti`/ (4) +6 VERTICAL (3) CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi ! I (4) CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi (5> CMU CELLS FILLED W/ 3000psi II�iJt TIES AT I ! ` - i ( } 'I I. 6" O.C. I VERT_ REBAR (2) IN Eal H CML I (IFI i {EXTEND ALL VERT- REINF. FROM CONC. AND W/ (6) a6 VERTICAL CONC. AND W/ (8) =6 VERTICAL CONC. AND W/ (10) +6 VERTICAL I 1i Ii (2) +5 CONT. VERT_ Z ^nor nD r s 8'' HOOK IN FTG. DNC. BEA1, (2) IN EACH f -LAM CELL r2l I"' EACH CMU CELL kcs -,Y !! (2` IN EACH CMU CELL occtAR BnTTOM e�lv i i i t2) a5. ( CONT i BELOW TO 811 HOOK IN (FX ---- At L VERT. REINF. FROM f (Fa TEND ALL VERT, RFINF, FROM I�I {_WTEND ALL VERT. REINF. FROM VERT. REBAR 8" HOOK IN FTC. TO 811 HOOK IN 8" HOOK IN FTG. TO S' HOOK IIN 811 HOOK IN FTG. TO 8" HOOK IN BOTTOM BEAM AT T/WALL TYP.) BEAi•,<1 AT T/WALL TYP.) BEAM AT T/WALL TYP.) i i I BEAM AT T/WALL TVP) t { i� �`-i i l TA i i t■�-s �r� /� MIC 2 �'€TAIL ��ipp�� % �//�� ii I rlA1L 1 i �°- ! t�� � t i L ! i [i I {+ i~f! D ii€C.. { E..� .!\il iVii��.0 i�E �:� t iJC P1EL .f".s� i IL_ A nnn ocl CONCRETE � 400r' PSI CONCRETE ! (TYP)—.` 1 i 81, (TYP) 8" OR i2" 811 OR 12" I lE CLR. ! i j CLR, 81, NOM. {�} a5 T,S46, I I. i i\ MUM.1 n ! I 1 [ / I . ; ii r i t F i _ I •�I I FILLED SINGLE Dol COURSE OF CMU (2) +5 CONT. i 1 �I ir"« i I Q. ` O� �N I ,Or t(t�Att { �(-�--1 CJ i j ( V r1 1 1 IIT 1, I NOCK- KNOCK -ODI LINTEL O G. - I t OR Imu LINTEL (Y 1 1 wi " 11 I_ �i ` ! ~ • FILLED SINGLE co1 i I I +3 STIRRUPS • FILLED DOUBLE _,� THE — W/ (2) +5xCONT. i I 1 � ! (2) +5 CONT. sol �'i� I °D1 I I 1T Irl 1 �- {2) +SxCONT. AT I COURSE OF CMU i KNOCK -OU' LINTEL! W/ (2)=SxCONT. _ iii D I AT 6" O.C. i i I ( r I LiN I EL BEAM I l i s= I I W/ f4) �xCONT. ( HORtZ. REiivF. I ! �! f—' I I i j I H I t MiODLE REBAR e t i {{ �. +3 STIRRUPS f I a' it AT 6" O.C_ j II I— S_ I! I t TOP COURT 1 1 I I I pI (2) a CONT } 5 1 I I 1 h 1 A 4D A i vv , I �� B ;T FE64r? = I= �I - II • o H S DRE -CAST I�! ; i LINTEL W/ • • I �� i (2) +5xC0NL I E I Mill I i i l E i LI ; �t I ! I1 1 t CEI I L-! !—I , I i I I ! �� ' s • H.S. PRE -CAST 114 LINTEL W/ II�Etl {2)arxCONI. i T� 3N - DETAIL B-2 DETAIL � B-3 LDETAIL ! R -A nFTA R--;;nFTAIL i �II�TEL �E 1 1 aclCO,NCRP-rE I (F 1 An, -)n41 nif ac�1I, rYi oVr,\Yi,V_ pIkL1= ; rL 4T11.J10\fnV Pf c...Jtf CON'-REIE4CCY L I i I I t t (3) +5 CONT . TOP REBAR (2) =5 CONT. AT THIRD SPA 11 +3 STIRRUPS AT 6'f O.C. _5 CONT. BOT T _REBAR GRADE BEAM 4000 PSI CONICRETE M I I � 3 ' � W� l }' a i tiff_ N »r _o it a '. v 4 rO La C v1 molal _Isl ei� 1 F v tl) I 3 CC ce) 3- e6 td QJ c `g $ C3 ;"', m .r. V Z'7a U C> � 00 a 0 nLL L 4 a M a T I I � 3 ' � W� l }' a i tiff_ il) »r _o it a !Q La � I molal _Isl ei� 1 F tl) I 3 CC ce) 3- e6 td QJ c `g U- D e .r. V Z'7a U C> � 00 a 0 nLL L L z �_ m Z U (0 1 a T I I � 3 ' uJ W� N 1 i . »r _o it a !Q La � I molal _Isl ei� 1 F !C; 3 CC -2 3- O td QJ c `g U- D O:f .r. V Z'7a U C> LL a a T L 1 I I � 3 ' O W� N 1 i . »r _o it a !Q La � I L 1 I I 1 I i i I ( 1 i molal _Isl ei� 1 F !C; 3 U 8 3- \ td U- D O:f L 1 CML 1: SEE ARCH. DYr'G.S. TYPICAL AT IMTr=PSECTInnIS LINTEL BEAM NOTE=FOR BEAM CORNERS AT ENDS OF WALLS (FOR EXAMPLE IN THE VERTICAI PLANE) HOOK BEAM REINF. DOWN INTO CONC. COL_ OR FILLED CELLS IN SIMILAR MANNER AS IN HORIZONTAL PLANE I -.eUar Lap Splice ®mail SCALE: N.T.S. PRE -FAB METAL KEYWAY (GALVANIZED) 611 4 Q 11 EXPANSION JOINT EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL T Y P. COLD JOINT BETWEEN POURS OCCURS SEE ARCH. DWGS. ONLY AT "C.J." LOCATIONS SEE FND. PLAN �6";i6"I I EXP; NS310N J 0 1 N T Ifg" WIDE x 1" DEEP GROOVE WITH FAST DRY TRAFFIC SEALANT FILLER AT EXPOSED FLOOR 1" DEEP SAW CUTS TO BE MADE WITHIN 24 HRS. OF POUR. AS PER ter. 111- 111 x__1 €� SPECIFICATIONS WWF SHALL Tyr,. r_.0. Uri [flu. plan BE CONTINUOUS AT ALL CONTROL JOIKITC €TVP. C.J. U.0 N.) SAI/€ CHIT J^I"yT T'!P• "e' ; ft On Ind_ pian Ii Iii�RIC'�il-�.I=i1 i1�■ii it a iFv-'ee"' 1��Fy4e■e `v104r Vyee 14 vv4u1■i'g. i AV -A-AI E. N.I SIZE ilmu NUMBER MATCH CONT.FTG, MAX. FOOTING STEP - 2`-0" SEE FOUNDATION PLAN 2`-0" FOR LOCATIONS Stepped Foo inn rlmtail Stepped L11 1 i. L.0 V LLd! 11 6 SCALE: N.T.S. TERM TOP BARS W/ STD. 90 HK. OR LAP W/ CORNER BAR 3 TIES c 6" O.C. OVER M.O. CONT. OR LAP PER SCHED. r —TIES OVER CMU WALL_ A STIRRUPS ! TOP BARS, EAT END THRU CAN I-ILE BOT. BARS LAPS V COL. PER SCHED. / TIE BM I PROVIDE REINF. CONC. SE7 PLAN, SCHEDULE & DET AIL FILLED CELLS a 24" O.C. MAX. OVER OPENING PRECAST LINTEL, SEE GREATER THAN 6`-0" MASONRY NOTES NOTE= SEE BM_ SECTIONS & DET ALS FOR BAR SIZES & SP. Conc. Beam Reint Diad: a l SCALE= N.T.S. RE: 5101 FIRST STIRRUP AT 1/2 SP FROM SUPPORT CANTILEVER TENSION Liar SPLICES CINCHES) GRADE 60 REINFORCEMENT ei•� E J FI Flt iii 9tiET4f !tel FE E rte€ l�.F iCFI iF iE I)STSO DEGREE HOOK. i .11 114y. 140E %JU11 F4 i f1: ii4/e VOi: ! iS.Ii it :.Ov4tAei B Jv.ASLF. N.T.J. 24 I._JLL' v 25 24 FILLED CELL; SEE I 1 33 25 PLANS P 6" MIN SPLICE 4i_ I I �� USE PREFAB CORNER 31 °o I A ! 1\ilE OR OVERLAP & TIE 1-6 B i 49 I 37 HORIZ. JT. REINF. j A 1 54 42 •7 AT CORNERS 73 1 54 F "or I i 12" CMU v TYPICAL AT IMTr=PSECTInnIS LINTEL BEAM NOTE=FOR BEAM CORNERS AT ENDS OF WALLS (FOR EXAMPLE IN THE VERTICAI PLANE) HOOK BEAM REINF. DOWN INTO CONC. COL_ OR FILLED CELLS IN SIMILAR MANNER AS IN HORIZONTAL PLANE I -.eUar Lap Splice ®mail SCALE: N.T.S. PRE -FAB METAL KEYWAY (GALVANIZED) 611 4 Q 11 EXPANSION JOINT EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL T Y P. COLD JOINT BETWEEN POURS OCCURS SEE ARCH. DWGS. ONLY AT "C.J." LOCATIONS SEE FND. PLAN �6";i6"I I EXP; NS310N J 0 1 N T Ifg" WIDE x 1" DEEP GROOVE WITH FAST DRY TRAFFIC SEALANT FILLER AT EXPOSED FLOOR 1" DEEP SAW CUTS TO BE MADE WITHIN 24 HRS. OF POUR. AS PER ter. 111- 111 x__1 €� SPECIFICATIONS WWF SHALL Tyr,. r_.0. Uri [flu. plan BE CONTINUOUS AT ALL CONTROL JOIKITC €TVP. C.J. U.0 N.) SAI/€ CHIT J^I"yT T'!P• "e' ; ft On Ind_ pian Ii Iii�RIC'�il-�.I=i1 i1�■ii it a iFv-'ee"' 1��Fy4e■e `v104r Vyee 14 vv4u1■i'g. i AV -A-AI E. N.I SIZE ilmu NUMBER MATCH CONT.FTG, MAX. FOOTING STEP - 2`-0" SEE FOUNDATION PLAN 2`-0" FOR LOCATIONS Stepped Foo inn rlmtail Stepped L11 1 i. L.0 V LLd! 11 6 SCALE: N.T.S. TERM TOP BARS W/ STD. 90 HK. OR LAP W/ CORNER BAR 3 TIES c 6" O.C. OVER M.O. CONT. OR LAP PER SCHED. r —TIES OVER CMU WALL_ A STIRRUPS ! TOP BARS, EAT END THRU CAN I-ILE BOT. BARS LAPS V COL. PER SCHED. / TIE BM I PROVIDE REINF. CONC. SE7 PLAN, SCHEDULE & DET AIL FILLED CELLS a 24" O.C. MAX. OVER OPENING PRECAST LINTEL, SEE GREATER THAN 6`-0" MASONRY NOTES NOTE= SEE BM_ SECTIONS & DET ALS FOR BAR SIZES & SP. Conc. Beam Reint Diad: a l SCALE= N.T.S. RE: 5101 FIRST STIRRUP AT 1/2 SP FROM SUPPORT CANTILEVER TENSION Liar SPLICES CINCHES) GRADE 60 REINFORCEMENT ei•� E J FI Flt iii 9tiET4f !tel FE E rte€ l�.F iCFI iF iE I)STSO DEGREE HOOK. i .11 114y. 140E %JU11 F4 i f1: ii4/e VOi: ! iS.Ii it :.Ov4tAei B Jv.ASLF. N.T.J. 24 I._JLL' A TYPICAL AT IMTr=PSECTInnIS LINTEL BEAM NOTE=FOR BEAM CORNERS AT ENDS OF WALLS (FOR EXAMPLE IN THE VERTICAI PLANE) HOOK BEAM REINF. DOWN INTO CONC. COL_ OR FILLED CELLS IN SIMILAR MANNER AS IN HORIZONTAL PLANE I -.eUar Lap Splice ®mail SCALE: N.T.S. PRE -FAB METAL KEYWAY (GALVANIZED) 611 4 Q 11 EXPANSION JOINT EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL T Y P. COLD JOINT BETWEEN POURS OCCURS SEE ARCH. DWGS. ONLY AT "C.J." LOCATIONS SEE FND. PLAN �6";i6"I I EXP; NS310N J 0 1 N T Ifg" WIDE x 1" DEEP GROOVE WITH FAST DRY TRAFFIC SEALANT FILLER AT EXPOSED FLOOR 1" DEEP SAW CUTS TO BE MADE WITHIN 24 HRS. OF POUR. AS PER ter. 111- 111 x__1 €� SPECIFICATIONS WWF SHALL Tyr,. r_.0. Uri [flu. plan BE CONTINUOUS AT ALL CONTROL JOIKITC €TVP. C.J. U.0 N.) SAI/€ CHIT J^I"yT T'!P• "e' ; ft On Ind_ pian Ii Iii�RIC'�il-�.I=i1 i1�■ii it a iFv-'ee"' 1��Fy4e■e `v104r Vyee 14 vv4u1■i'g. i AV -A-AI E. N.I SIZE ilmu NUMBER MATCH CONT.FTG, MAX. FOOTING STEP - 2`-0" SEE FOUNDATION PLAN 2`-0" FOR LOCATIONS Stepped Foo inn rlmtail Stepped L11 1 i. L.0 V LLd! 11 6 SCALE: N.T.S. TERM TOP BARS W/ STD. 90 HK. OR LAP W/ CORNER BAR 3 TIES c 6" O.C. OVER M.O. CONT. OR LAP PER SCHED. r —TIES OVER CMU WALL_ A STIRRUPS ! TOP BARS, EAT END THRU CAN I-ILE BOT. BARS LAPS V COL. PER SCHED. / TIE BM I PROVIDE REINF. CONC. SE7 PLAN, SCHEDULE & DET AIL FILLED CELLS a 24" O.C. MAX. OVER OPENING PRECAST LINTEL, SEE GREATER THAN 6`-0" MASONRY NOTES NOTE= SEE BM_ SECTIONS & DET ALS FOR BAR SIZES & SP. Conc. Beam Reint Diad: a l SCALE= N.T.S. RE: 5101 FIRST STIRRUP AT 1/2 SP FROM SUPPORT CANTILEVER TENSION Liar SPLICES CINCHES) GRADE 60 REINFORCEMENT BAR SIZE j SPLICE CLASS 1 TOP REINF. JOTHER REINF. I)STSO DEGREE HOOK. A 24 24 I'3 B 25 24 I._JLL' A 25 24 a4 T B 33 25 A 31 24 #5 B 41 31 � � r A i 37 29 1-6 B i 49 I 37 j A 1 54 42 •7 B 73 1 54 -FOR HORIZONTAL MEMBERS (BEAM, JOIST, SLABS, ETC.) USE FOR COLUMN (U.O.N.) 1 I ROOF SLOPE LOCATE STEP AS REQ'D TO MAINTAIN T/BM 4" ABOVE T/JOIST MIN. I' --%T" riF F v4vrrV ALL: IN. I .C. STEP 2'-0" TIFE ielF EZ°'`'� Detail ✓ve ea,U v+CI i ia,uFF CONT. PVC CONTROL v'ON 1 INSERT FILLED CELL (TYP. Mason Al SCALE: N.T.S. 0-2 AT ROOF SEE PLAN CONTROL BLOCK UNIT CONT. BACKER ROD AND SEALANT BOTH SIDES - ,g'i JOINT TYP. CONTROL BLOCK UNIT NOTE- 1) "MCJ."-MASONRY CONTROL JOINT 7) PROVIDE A DUMMY JOINT AT TIE BEAMS IN LINE W/ MCJ. Control Joint flINAL�CR.Li.) Qetail s3 STIRRUPS ,—(3) •5 CONT. AT 6" O.C. / TOP REBAR e TERM. TOP BARS—, rr FootiL grade Beam Fli'i I)STSO DEGREE HOOK. I� `NII3TH BEAM I._JLL' SECTION\jw -J o{1 w o ! tt 1 i B.O. BEA.+.t, s3 STIRRUPS ,—(3) •5 CONT. AT 6" O.C. / TOP REBAR e rr FootiL grade Beam LF �r 9 I._JLL' 1L!lFtl. F .aJ. N (3) •5 CONT. (2) &5I CONT. AT BOT. REBAR THIRD SPANS 45 VERT. BARS FROM FOOTING INTO GRADE BEAM SEE FOOTING SCHED. FOR FOOTING REINF. (2) •4 x 4'-0" AT MID -DEPTH OF SLAB TYPICAL. CMU RE-ENTRANT CORNER IE. CMU WALL W/ ISOLATED SL.B.8, CORNER 1, = s� EXPANSION JOINT OUTLINE OF FOOTING i■: s iiF i1 ...1F — € €€€ ..sF €€ z nii ar ■ �wrev4.a1 e'L i�l�I ILI Owe e4 %.fWl a 1%.01 ✓%,F 44411 QPAI AI T C k,'ri A___. ti VT. R€BAR IN CMU CELL FILLED W/ 3000psi CONC. AS REQ'D. IN PLANS DT CTRUCT NOTES DOWELS TO MATCH VT. REINF. SIZE AND QTY. (TYP.) C) Ei 0 O mlu 00 J a IC 8" HOOK INTO FnnTWCG f iii ii =3i sa 9 ' V 1o_-Ii%-%AI 1�ii1ii1L'A J4ALE'• !'J. 1.5. •5 HOOK AT TOP SEE PLAN AND FTG. SCHEDULE FOR SIZE, DEPTH AND REINF. REQ'D. IN FTGS. 3" 'CLR. COV. (TYP.) a rr i LF �r � :- �f I -J i A w o ! tt 1 i �J Q I - ■r � � r ... I Cgd1 a I g C e � P F .fie a v 12 j _1 i a iz' I -J LL i I �r � :- �f I -J i A w o ! tt 1 i �J N ■r ... I Cgd1 a I g C e � P Z ca v 12 j 1L a iz' I -J LL i I � stn ::ail lmi s m a '^ m 3 w J -J i A w o ! tt 1 i �J N ... Cgd1 iV g C e � co Z o v g i 1L a iz' O Z i A w o ! tt 1 i N ... ! iV iz' �-i I � stn ::ail lmi O Z i A w o ! tt 1 i N ... "IR T.O. BEAM SEE ARCH. DWGS. B-3 SEE 5201 FOR DETAIL SIMPSON META16 AT 4'-0" O.C. VARIES T 0. BEA!. STEP AS NEC. B-2 SEE S201 FOR DETAIL DOUBLE ROW OF 10d NAILS AT 6" O.C. TO (2)-2x4 CONT. LEDGER $rs" CDX PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 4" O.C. EDGES AND 611 O.C. FIELD 2X6 P DIA. C.i` v T.v. EAMWhi i % PRE-ENGINEERED WOC / AT 24" O.C. MAX. j B-2 SEE 5201 € .I k1w _r/ 11 FOR DETAIL II Ii11"\1"it I (2) 200 P.T. CONT. LEDGER W/ 74" DIA. A.B.H it 10"f311 AT iS" O.C. Ii I I 1 � StMPSHUS26 TYP. STAGGERED INTO GROUT it 1 EPON A. SS FILLED CELLS 1 FruSS tO �: a,O, ;r�i !,r".�all S%Ai E: ;i.T.S. SEE PLAN SEE PLAN SER W/ 32" D CELLS TRUSSES B.O. TRUS BEAM SEE PLAN —r� i"4" PLATE i �2\ � (4)}4" DIA A325 BOLTS TYP �I TS COL. SEE PLAN OF COL.& STIFFENED PLATE Steel Beam to Steel Col. Bra. Conn. SCALE: N.T.S. } �ii.1 i SIMPSON META12 AT EA. TRUSS 2X8 CONT. BLOCKING t ATTACH TO WALL I, WITH SIMPSON' MAS AT 12" O.C. / 4 11 WOOD TR(l?rSES/ i AT 24" 01t. I III i{�1 11�'' SLOPED 1P,T-- -01 T.O. 'MALL SEE 1 1' 5201 FOR DETAIL 111 I ! SIMPSON HUS26 TYP. j EA. TRUSS I e (2) 2x6 P.T. CONT. LEDGER W/74" UiA. 1i A.B. 10"+--" AT 32" O.C. INTO GROUT I FILLED CELLS ' I 'r B.O. LINTEL B-5 MASOivRY BEAM ABOVE �PENiNG SEE Sem LanofJy Jtea 4stion SC 6'-3" —2xB AT 24" O.C. TOP CHORD SIMPSON H10 EA. TRUSS EQ. EQ` EQ. 2X6 AT 24"' Q.G. BOTTOM CHORD �r$ ` CDX PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NALS AT 4" O.C. EDGES AND 6" O.C. FIELD VARIES T.O. BEAM SEE ARCH. DWGS. B-3 SEE S201 FOR DETAIL SIMPSON META16 *T 4' -O" O.C. AT BLOCKING LOCATION J, VARIES `? T u. BEAM STEP AS NEC. B-2 SEE 5201 FOR DETAIL DOUBLE ROW OF 10d NAILS AT 6" O.C. TO (2)-2x4 CONT. LEDGER CDX PLYWOOD SHEAT'r,'1NG W/ 10d NAILS AT 4" Q.C. EDGES Alin 6" O.C. FIELD 2x4 BLOCK DIAPHRAM S LOCATIONS 1L1 2XD P.I. yrs DIA. A.B. O.C. INTO G FOR DLOCK SI01 FOR NT.LEDGER -3" AT 32" T FILLED C AT 134" Q.C. MAX. 2x4 P T. CONT. LEDGER W/5,'Wi Dik EXP. A.B. Wf i i- i 31r2 MIN EMBEDMENT .AT 4811 n.C. INTO GROUT FILLED CELLS -I •� Truss Parallel to Masonry Wall Jt.AL—� hI T..Ci_ BEAM SEE PLAN I i I BEAM BOL T I ROWS I W8 t 2 W10 2 I W12 I 3 W14 3 I SEE PLAN WIDE FLANGE REAM SEE PLAN STD DOUBLE ANGLE FRAMING CONN. W/ 74" DIA. A325 BOLTS. USE MIN. %6" ANGLES U.O.N. SEE SCHED ,ABOVE FOR NO. OF ROWS OF BOLTS PER BEAM DEPTH Steal Beam to Steel Beam Conn. SCALE: N.T.S. VARIES CDX PLYWOOD! SHEATHING W/ 10di NAILS AT 4" O.C. EDGES LAND 6" O.C. FIELD (2) 2x6 W/vif DIA. BOLTS AT 12 O.G 1 STAGGERED (4) 10d NAILS (TY? ALL CONNECTIONS) T.O. PARAP6 TRUSS BR 15"-611 T.n. RFAM Y 2x4 AT 24" O.C. WEBS AND VERTICAL 'rsef CDX PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 4" O.C. EDGES AND 6" O.G. FIELD 2x4 BLOCKING AS SHOWN W/ (2) 10d NAILS EA. STUD 11'-411 B.O. FRAMINT (4) IOd NAILS (T 1 P. ALL CONNECTIONS) �, vAriiES T.O. RE AM SEE ARCH. DWGS, B-3 SEE 52n1 FOR DETAIL T.O. BEAM VARIES TE SP AS REQ'D. DOUBLE ROW OF 10d NAILS AT 6" C.C. TO (2)-2x4 CONT. LEDGER " %DX PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 4" O.C. EDGES AND 6" O.C. FIELD �— c2) 2x6 P.T. CON LI -D( -FR LI -D( -FR 'i1/%,, nIA_ A.R. it ` At 3211 O.C. INTO GRIT 1LLED CELLS B -`L SEE S201J FOR DETAIL oi: I zI! 11 oon i LONG PIA A325 AT t;" C/ C SIMPSON M T T28B STRAP--`_ W/ is" THREADED ROD PLATE HFIGH 1 I STUD '"H" ! DxL STUD I QTY. 1 W8 -W14 j P-1 11 1 74"x6" i 6 W1c-W18 1 P-2 TRUSSES I ! 74 ,. ,, x11 l ,t w , ; 24" �. 14;-8;;%I 10 I i.d MASONRY 1.0. GIRUCR 611G. PLATE A 4r k i v I II` II 13'-8 1, 13'-$" T I B.Q. TRUSS B.Q. TRUSS I f t — v i 2x4 P.T. CONT. LEDGER W/%" DIA. EXP. A.B. W/ [[i 8 I { zii " MIN EMBEDMENT AT 46" O.C.IN 10 GROUT f FILLED CELLS I- L V11 E k LU llymon MVI 4A,./V SCALE: N.T_S_ m ti j PRE-ENGINEERED WOOD TRUSSES AT 2411 O.C. MAX. TRUSS GIRDER MC -2 AT TRUSS GIRDER BEAM PLATE I MARK PLATE HFIGH 1 I STUD '"H" ! DxL STUD I QTY. 1 W8 -W14 j P-1 11 1 74"x6" i 6 W1c-W18 1 P-2 1 18'" I ! 74 ,. ,, x11 l i 8 I W21-24 ; P-3 I t ; 24" 74"x6" 10 it p�h i.d MASONRY COLUMN li l i OR FILLED CELLS SEE PLAN SEf� WIDE FLAe":r�17 '' � BEf,hi SEE PLAN SEE 5301-6 FOR CONN. PLATE%2"x811. SEE SCHED. ABOVE FOR PLATE HEIGHT AND STUD ONTY 7 Steel Beam to Cmu Column SCALE: N.T.S. (2) 2x8 P.T. CONT. LEDGER W/ (2±%" ^viA. A.B. 1D'ey311 E.A. SI UE OF OPENING INTO GROUT FILLED CELLS T TYPICAL (2) 2x6 P.T. CONT. LEDGER W/ yrs" DIA. A.B. AT 32" O.G. INTO GROUT FILLED CELLS RE: S301-1 FJJ, I it L I 4" BLOCK AT LOCATION OF- SPANDRAI_ GI ASS SFE ARCH. SWGS. FOR LOCATIONS t Uel,l� C1OsurG A Calc 1 ICI IL CIL 44 fllOGK nn At r. u T n eJl=NJ r • IV. I0 5/s,l CDX PLYWOOD SHEATHING W/ 10d NAILS AT 4" G.C. EDGES AND 6" O.C. FIELD nA CTIIl1C AT Lx JI VVJ nI 24" O.C. VERT. TOP 2x4 BEYOND w Cv 2x6 BEYOND IA! w i SIMPSON MTS16. FR(ilA f21-2xR 11 HEADER TO P.E,PEi.T. (4 LOCATIONS UNIT) ; PRF -ENGINEERED WOOD TRUSSES { { E AT 24" O.0MAX. �Lil u v "a ­n= l4ln (2)2x4 STUDS VERT. AT END OF WALL -� SIMPSON H5 EA. STUD 2x4 STUDS AT 24" O.C. / HORIZ. i l l ti \ I €t Y - i t i7 i `� i , it c '!1 1111 1 2X4 P T CONT LEDCER— W/'rs" DIA, EXP. A.B. W/ 3%2" MIN EMBEDMENT AT 4111' O C. IK11 1 (=ROUT FILLEU CELLS FUI1 HEIGHT 8" MASONRY WAI (21 2v6 P.T. CONT. LEDGER W/%" DIA. A.B. 10"-3" AT 32" O.C. INTO GROUT FILLED CELLS Cantilever Parapet Over Pprif Plan View SCALE: N.T.S. i z l .r 3 4, U II cv W NOW W I it p�h i.d I W m w w M cn T I . f t — v �Lerl [[i 8 f co v V ii L 00 C m ti It n n a ca L.! E LL z l .r 3 4, II cv C k NOW W I it p�h c.4 I W m w w cn T I co cc (U `N �Lerl [[i I� f co v V ii L 00 C m ti s c m Z U { a ca L.! E LL z l .r 3 II cv NOW W I 0 I � I I w I (U -a I I� � I co v V ii JIM V 0 E C i a ca L.! E LL z l .r 3 cv NOW ME w - ii a.� -JII .-„_:. I PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES • ALL WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE NATIONAL, STATE, AND LOCAL CODES. THIS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, THE FLORIDA PLUMBING CODE. • REVIEW PLANS OF ALL TRADES PRIOR TO BIDDING AND INSTALLATION TO INCLUDE ALL PLUMBING FOR COMPLETE SYSTEMS SHOWN ON THE PLANS AND AS REQUIRED. • COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO PREVENT INTERFERENCE WITH HVAC DUCTS, STRUCTURE, ELECTRICAL LIGHTING, AND OTHER PIPING IN THE CEILING SPACE. VENT PIPING AND WATER PIPING SHALL BE HELD EITHER ABOVE OR BELOW HVAC DUCTWORK AS COORDINATED WITH THE HVAC CONTRACTOR. • ALL CHANGES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. • COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE ROUGHING -IN PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES. • THE PLUMBING SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. • THE PLUMBING SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL AND MAKE ALL PLUMBING CONNECTIONS. • VERIFY MOUNTING HEIGHT AND WATER CONNECTION SIZES TO ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. FURNISH CUT-OUT TEMPLATES, FOR PLUMBING FIXTURES TO BE INSTALLED IN MILLWORK, TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. • MAKE PROPER HOT AND COLD WATER, WASTE AND VENT PIPING CONNECTIONS TO ALL FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT EVEN THOUGH ALL FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN. • VERIFY LOCATION OF EXISTING WATER SERVICE AND THE LOCATION/ INVERTS OF SANITARY PIPING PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. • THIS CONTRACTOR TO DO ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING REQUIRED TO INSTALL ANY PORTION OF THIS WORK. PATCH WITH NEW MATERIALS OF THE SAME TYPE THAT WAS REMOVED. REFINISH PATCHED SURFACE TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT SURFACES. • ALL PLUMBING VENTS IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE OFF -SET A MINIMUM OF 3'-0” BEFORE ROOF PENETRATION. • INSTALL WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS WHERE WATER PRESSURES ARE EXCESSIVE OR WHERE REQUIRED TO ELIMINATE WATER HAMMER OR WHEN DEEMED NECESSARY BY LOCAL AUTHORITIES. LOCATE AND SIZE AS RECOMMENDED BY THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF PLUMBING ENGINEERS. • ALL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH THESE PLANS SHALL NOT PASS THRU OR ABOVE ANY ROOM DESIGNATED AS AN ELECTRICAL ROOM. • IT IS IN THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS TO COVER ALL WORK AND MATERIAL FOR A FIRST CLASS INSTALLATION. ANY EQUIPMENT, PLUMBING FIXTURE, TRIM HARDWARE AND/OR DEVICES USUALLY UTILIZED IN THE CLASS OF WORK, THOUGH NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS, BUT WHICH MAY BE NECESSARY FOR THE SATISFACTORY COMPLETION OF THE WORK (AS DETERMINED BY THE ARCHITECT) SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR AS PART OF HIS TOTAL WORK. • ALL WORK, BOTH MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION, SHALL BE GUARANTEED FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER. PLUMBING LEGEND DESCRIPTION ABBREV. SYMBOL SMITARY PIPING SAN OPENFRONT SEAT SUPPLY WITH STOP. KOHLER HIGHLINE MODEL K -3544,x -4670-C VENT PIPING V - - - COLD WATER PIPING CW - - - - - - - HOT WATER PIPING HW - -- - -- - -- GATE VALVE GV —DQ---- CLEAN OUT TO GRADE COTG WALL CLEAN OUT WCO WCO I (---- TYPICAL (TYP) HB 1• CAP T CAP E -- HOSE BIBB HB HB -- VENT THRU ROOF VENT VTR MOP BASIN 24"x24" MOLDED STONE, FLOOR MOUNTED 3" STAINLESS STEEL DRAIN, DUAL HANDLE WALL MOUNTED FAUCET WITH INTEGRAL STOPS, PAIL TEE UP HOOK WALL BRACE AND VACUUM BREAKER, MOP HANGER, HOSE AND HOSE ' 0 TEE DOWN WH -1 WATER HEATER A.O. SMITH MODEL EL SF- 20, 4.5KW, 208V/10 , 20 GAL TANK. 90• UP PROVIDE WALL MOUNT BRACKET 0-- 90' DOWN O 0 FLOOR CLEAN OUT FCO FCO O -- TRAP PRKR PIPING TPP - - - -TPP- - - - PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE WC -1 HANDICAPPED WATER CLOSET FLOOR MOUNTED, PRESSURE ASSIST FLUSH TANK 7" WHITE VITREOUS CHINA, WHIT HIGH FOR HANDICAPPED USE, 1.6 GPF, ELONGATED, OPENFRONT SEAT SUPPLY WITH STOP. KOHLER HIGHLINE MODEL K -3544,x -4670-C I SEAT ,K 7637 SUPOLY. L-1: WALL GLE CAST I LONG LEVER FAUCET. .FLORY:ATO"AW' GRIID STRAINERNO'FFSETSTAI PIECE, BRASS'PITRAP, LAVATORY KOHLER INSTALL SUPPLIES WITH STOP. ALL PIPING BELOW SHALL BE INSULATED. T GREENWICH MODEL K-2032, K-15597-5 FAUCET, K-7715 STRAINER, K-8998 P -TRAP, K -7605-P SUPPLIES. DF -1 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER SINGLE, WALL HUNG, BARRIER -FREE, STAINLESS STEEL, FRONT AND SIDE PUSH BARS, DUAL STREAM BUBBLER,8 GPM INSTALLED IN A CLOSED OF 50 DEGREE WATER, 115/1/60. ELKAY MODEL EBFATL-6. (WITH DIXIE CUP a--+Tn DISPENSEE6RR�) HB 1• BOX W/ FORDVMO'DELE24-B. : WALL ES�OUTTVACUUM T BREAKER. WO DASS HANDLEI%EL 4" HOSE THREAD WCO: STEEL ACCESS COVER, I I DURA COATED CAST IRON BODY,fA CHOTH PPE SIZE. MB -1 MOP BASIN 24"x24" MOLDED STONE, FLOOR MOUNTED 3" STAINLESS STEEL DRAIN, DUAL HANDLE WALL MOUNTED FAUCET WITH INTEGRAL STOPS, PAIL HOOK WALL BRACE AND VACUUM BREAKER, MOP HANGER, HOSE AND HOSE W HANGAR. FIAT MODEL MSB -2424. WH -1 WATER HEATER A.O. SMITH MODEL EL SF- 20, 4.5KW, 208V/10 , 20 GAL TANK. OUTLET PROVIDE WALL MOUNT BRACKET -: WH -1 _.-.. MB Y4" HOT AND COLD WATER TO WATER HEATER AND MOP BASIN RE: P101-7 I Y'4' HW - -J --WC1u 1 3'4 cw COLD WATER TO I) I II) EACH WATER CLOSET I COLD AND HOT WAT 1 Ii / TO EACH LAVATORY L 1i� 7T 1 _I Id a 1L r!_ - � %p" CW TO E.W.C._ I 'ISI P' CW I i 2 Enlarged Water Supply Plan SCALE: 1/4" - T-0" 16" SQUARE CONCRETE PAD TROWEL SMOOTH AND EDGE FINISHED GRADE PVC WASTE LINE LENGTH TO SUIT TWO WAY CLEAN R&G SLOAN PVC PART NO.3724 WASTE LINE 6 2 W; SCALE: NTS BRASS CLEANOUT PLUG W/ COUNTER SUNK HEAD — - - - - - - -------- - I TYPICAL .� I INSTALLATION I I _ -�I I I ALT HOT WATER INSTALL I THERMAL EXPANSION T OUTLET TANK IF WATER HEATER IS E INSTALLED IN A CLOSED a--+Tn WATER SYSTEM. T I 8 I I I I N"CN I HOT WATER W (D + OUTLET RT&P z L -_o O iFUSED ELECT. RELIEF 2 FL a U L 3� SUPPLY 1 VALVE z J C 2 C/^,o� CD vI J U w DRAIN LINECOLD 1 WATER 4UNIOiNati0N4FFSWITCH INLET SHUTOFF 6"AIR GAP VALVE DRAIN VALVE � FLOOR DRAIN DRAIN PAN PIPED TO I DRAIN I I } OVERCU R RENT PROTECTION I }} 10 GALLON MODEL. MUST RESUPPLIED IN WATER 1 HEATERCIRCUIT. * INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL LOCAL COD ES. CONSULTLOCALCODEORNEC I FOR PROPER INSTALLATION, -------------------------i MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 1. DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE TYPE "L" COPPER WITH WROUGHT COPPER FITTINGS. 2. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC PIPE WITH SOLVENT FITTINGS. CONFORMING TO ASTM STANDARDS. 3. INSULATION SHALL BE FLEXIBLE UNICELLULAR -SELF -SEAL ARMAFLEX 2000 I/2" THICK FOR HOT WATER PIPING UP TO 2" SIZE - PROVIDE SHEET METAL SADDLES AT EACH HANGER. I MB -1 L-1 L-1 b�l DF -1 - 4" SAN. TO 5' OUTSIDE OF BUILDING. CONTRACTOR TO MAKE FINAL CONNECTION. SEE CIVIL FOR CONTINUATION 3 Enlarged Sanitary Plan SCALE: 1/4" - 1'-0" III III I I ANTI -SIPHON U 1 VACUUM BREAKER III III II � II I GATE VALVE - II I ASME T&P RELIEF - 11 I II 11 I 3/4" RELIEF PIPE ADJACENT T TO WALL AND DISCHARGE III li�'I 6" ABOVE MB -1 111 SII �L �I III ,III TANK DRAIN II II II 1 11 I II 1 III 11 III 1h" THREADED ROD FROM SHELF BELOW TO ANGLE BETWEEN ROOF TRUSSES ABOVE HOT & COLD WATER LINES, SEE PLANS \ - HEAT TW 4Riser Diagram SCALE NTS - I; II III 11111 III II II II III 111 II III � 11111 III 11 q III STORAGE TANK 11111 III 11111 III �II111 I! �Z II I FWOOD BLOCKING BETWEEN METAL STUD WALL FRAMING. � II BACKLTUURESLKO OSEEBOCINGI .7 — — V 11.3/4" PLYWOOD GALVANIZED SAFETY II WITH DRAIN MANUFACTURERS' METAL 1111 III d _ 1 I II III �•� -' - 1 I II III I I II III 1111 111 1 4 III 1 I II III '� j II III I II III _ 11j II . 7 Water Heater Detail 5 SCALE NTS ra 2 )(2.1 - MAY EXTEND AS A WASTE OR VENT I� I WALL WALLCOVER AND SCREW - PLUGGED TEE - WITH CLEANOUT FLOOR LINE 1 — 1/8 C.I. BEND ----- ---- BALANCE OF PIPING SAME AS CLEANOUT TO GRADE 6 Wall Cleanout Detail SCALE NTS I I "I I STUB OUT FORI COFFEE MAKER, %}I i II���II III II I Plumbing Plan SCALE 1/8" = P-0" 1 6,'�3 P101 U CD c: U.) ^, N U E a--+Tn CD T N"CN co W (D + cu WD z L -_o O o 2 FL a U L 3� C z J C 2 C/^,o� CD vI J U w P101 L- 1 U 'Z3 G -o O C: W (D cu T-0 z y.a � 1 o U u- a J P101 z •^y J J z w 1 w J I 0 0 o J W N O z Y N P101 MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES: 1. THE INTENT OF ALL MECHANICAL NOTES IS TO CLARIFY THE SCOPE OF WORK AND ALERT CONTRACTOR OF EXISTING CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR TO VISIT SITE AND VERIFY CLEARANCES BEFORE FABRICATION OF DUCTWORK. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL OFFSET AND/OR CHANGES IN DUCT SIZES TO MEET FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION SUBCONTRACTOR BEFORE ANY CONSTRUCTION WORK. 2. ALL SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED GALVANIZED SHEET METAL CONSTRUCTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST SMACNA STANDARDS. INSULATION SHALL HAVE AN INSTALLED MINIMUM THERMAL RESISTANCE (R) VALUE OF 6.0. ALL EXHAUST DUCTWORK SHALL BE GALVANIZED UNINSULATED SHEET METAL CONSTRUCTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST SMACNA STANDARDS. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SECURELY TAPED WITH 3" WIDE GLASS FABRIC TAPE WITH FOSTER 30/35 MASTIC OR EQUAL. ALL FLEXIBLE DUCTS TO BE EITHER SPIRAL ROUND SPRING STEEL WITH FLAMEPROOF VINYL SHEATHING OR CORRUGATED ALUM. AND MUST COMPLY WITH UL 181. PROVIDE 1" THICK CONTINUOUS FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS SHEATH WITH VINYL VAPOR BARRIER JACKET. NOTE ALL SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTS 54" OR GREATER FROM THE ROOF TOP UNIT MAY BE MINIMUM R-6 RIGID FIBERGLASS DUCT BOARD AT OWNER'S OPTION. OWNER SHALL SUBMIT A LETTER TO ENGINEER TO AUTHORIZE THE USE OF FIBERGLASS DUCT BOARD 3. DUCT SHALL BE SECURELY SUPPORTED,HUNG OR SUSPENDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 603 OF THE MECHANICAL SECTION ON THE 2001FBC 4. ROOF TOP UNIT OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE SHALL MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 10'-0" FROM ANY SANITARY OR EXHAUST VENT THRU ROOF PIPING. 5. PROVIDE ALL ROOF TOP UNITS WITH MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED SERVICE AREA CLEARANCES AND ELECTRICAL CONVENIENCE OUTLETS. 6. ALL ROOF TOP UNITS SHALL BE REINFORCED TO WITHSTAND LOCAL WIND LOAD DESIGN. (SEE ROOF CURB DETAIL ON MECHANICAL PLANS) 7. ALL TRANSFER DUCT WORK LEADING TO RESTROOMS SHALL HAVE A ZERO LEAKAGE BACKDRAFT DAMPER AS SHOWN ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. B. ALL ROOF TOP UNITS TO HAVE SMOKE DETECTORS IN SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT WORK. SMOKE DETECTORS SHALL SHUT DOWN UNIT UPON ACTIVATION. 9. IN GENERAL,PLANS AND DIAGRAMS ARE SCHEMATIC ONLY AND SHOULD NOT BE SCALED. HVAC CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY ADDED ELECTRICAL COSTS WHICH MAY RESULT FROM SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT. 10. DUCTWORK INSULATION SHALL BE 1-1/2" FOIL FACED FIBERGLASS DUCT WRAP. 11. COORDINATE AIR DEVICE LOCATIONS WITH LIGHTING FIXTURES. 12. TURNING VANES SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ALL SUPPLY DUCT RECTANGULAR ELBOWS WITH ANGLES BETWEEN 15 DEGREES AND LESS THAN 90 DEGREES PER FIG. 2-5 OF THE SMACNA MANUAL. 13. DUCT DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. DUCTWORK, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES, AND OTHER ITHEMS OF THE AIR HANDLING SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE SUPPORTED BY THE CEILING OR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM. 14. SMOKE DETECTOR(S) SHALL BE INSTALLED IN AIR SYSTEMS WITH A DESIGN CAPACITY GREATER THAN 2000 CFM IN THE SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK PRIOR TO MIXING WITH OUTSIDE AIR. FURTHERMORE, WHERE MULTIPLE AIR SYSTEMS SHARE COMMON SUPPLY OR RETURN AIR DUCTS OR PLENUMS WITH A COMBINED DESIGN CAPACITY GREATER THAN 2000 CFM, THE RETURN AIR AND SUPPLY AIR SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SMOKE DETECTORS. THE SMOKE DETECTOR(S) SHALL BE WIRED TO STOP THE FAN UPON DETECTION OF SMOKE, AND SIGNAL THE BUILDING FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL PER NFPA 72 IF THE BUILDING IS PROVIDED WITH FULL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, HOWEVER, IF THE BUILDING IS NOT PROVIDED WITH FULL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, SMOKE DETECTOR(S) SHALL CAUSE A VISIBLE AND AUDIBLE ALARM SIGNAL IN A NORMALLY OCCUPIED AREA PER NFPA 90A. WHERE AN APPROVED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS INSTALLED IN A BUILDING, SMOKE DETECTOR(S) SHALL BE FURNISHED AND WIRED BY THE ELECTRICAL OR FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR, AND SHALL BE CONNECTED TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM CODE. SMOKE DETECTOR(S)SHALL BE INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 15. ALL SUPPLY NR DIFFUSERS SHALL BE 4 -WAY THROW UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 16. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, INSTALL DUCTWORK AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE, TIGHT TO BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE. COORDINATE DUCT ELEVATION WITH RAIN LEADERS, WATER PIPING, SANITARY DRAINS, LIGHT FIXTURES, AND MAJOR ELECTRICAL CONDUITS. 17. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL SUPPLEMENTARY STEEL REQUIRED TO SUSPEND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS. INSTALLATION OF THE EQUIPMENT SHALL COMPLY WITH CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT AND MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 18. VERIFY VOLTAGE WITH ELECTRICAL BEFORE ORDERING EQUIPMENT. 19. PROVIDE A TRAP IN ALL CONDENSATE PIPING LOCATED AT THE ROOF TOP UNIT. SLOPE ALL CONDENSATE LINES /e" PER FOOT. PIPE SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC AND SHALL BE PROPERLY SUPPORTED (SEE CONDENSATE PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL). 20. ALL MECHANICAL WORK SHALL MEET ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE "FLORIDA MECHANICAL CODE 2001". 21. GUARANTEE, FOR ONE YEAR AFTER DATE OF ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER, ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP TO BE FREE FROM DEFECT. 22. DO NOT CUT STRUCTURAL MEMBERS WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OR ARCHITECT. ARRANGE FOR REPAIRS REQUIRED TO RESTORE OTHER WORK,BECAUSE OF DAMAGE CAUSED AS A RESULT OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS. 23. FLEXIBLE AND RIGID ROUND DUCT TAKE -OFFS FOR DIFFUSERS SHALL BE THE SAME SIZE AS DIFFUSER NECK. MAXIMUM FLEXIBLE DUCT LENGTH SHALL BE 8'-0". FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL BE THERMAFLEX TYPE M -KA OR EQUAL, AND BE UL LISTED AND COMPLY WITH NFPA STANDARD NO. 90A 24. ALL WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTATS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT AN ELEVATION OF 54" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO THE TOP UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS. LOCATION OF THE WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES FOR A NEAT APPEARANCE. FINAL LOCATION OF THERMOSTAT SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE IN THE FIELD. 25, ALL UNITS SHALL BE BALANCED TO WITHIN 10/. OF THE DESIGN AIR QUANTITY. BALANCE DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS TO WITHIN 10/. OF QUANTITIES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 26, PROVIDE FLEXIBLE NEOPRENE DUCT CONNECTORS ON THE DISCHARGE AND ENTERING SIDES OF ALL VIBRATING EQUIPMENT TO WHICH DUCTWORK IS ATTACHED. 27. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COPY OF THE TEST AND BALANCE REPORT. AIR BALANCING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AND BALANCING CONTRACTOR WHICH SHALL BE QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED BY EITHER ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC) OR NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU NEBB). THIS REPORT MUST BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE FINAL INSPECTION. 28. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TRADES INSTALLATION SCHEDULES. FIXED WORK SUCH AS DUCTWORK AND PLUMBING SHALL BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO ANY TRADE WORK THAT CAN BE EASILY RELOCATED OR OFFSET SUCH AS ELECTRICAL CONDUITS, SMALL WATER LINES ETC. 29. ERRORS OR OMISSIONS: IF THE INTENT OF ARCHITECT/ENGINEER WITH REGARD TO ANY DETAIL IS NOT CLEAR, OR IS CAPABLE OF MORE THAN ONE INTERPRETATION, SUCH MATTERS WILL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING BEFORE THE SUBMISSION OF BIDS, AND THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER SHALL MAKE CORRECTION OR EXPLANATION IN WRITING. OTHERWISE,NO EXTRA CHARGE WILL BE ALLOWED FOR THE WORK OR MATERIAL WHICH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER WILL REQUIRE, PROVIDED THAT IT COMES WITHIN A REASONABLE INTERPRETATION OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 30. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: INTENDED AS A GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED. ALL ITEMS NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN, BUT NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE MECHANICAL, ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS FINAL BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF/HERSELF WITH THE PLANS. PACKAGE ROOFTOP A/C UNIT SCHEDULE MARK 5--�, DUCTWORK, PIPING, OR EQUIPMENT RTU -1 RTU -2 NOTES 1. WITH FACTORY ROOF CURB AND THRU ROOF CURB SINGLE POINT ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. 2• WITH FACTORY MANUAL OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER AND HOOD. 3. EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE AVAILABLE AFTER COIL, FAN CASING, CLEAN FILTER AND ELECTRIC HEATER LOSSES. 4. PROVIDE HEATING/COOLING PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT AND 24 VOLT CONTROL WIRING. THERMOSTAT SHALL HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF STAGES OF HEATING AND COOLING AS THE UNIT AND DUAL SETPOINT AND EMERG- ENCY HEAT SWITCH. THERMOSTAT SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY SAME MANUFACTURER AS UNIT. 5. WITH FACTORY UNIT MOUNTED DISCONNECT AND CONVENIENCE OUTLET. 6. PROVIDE 5 MINUTE TIME DELAY TO PREVENT COMPRESSOR SHORT CYCLING. 7. INSTALL IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTOR IN SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCT,PRIOR TO OUTSIDE AIR DUCT/HOOD. 8. BELT DRIVE FOR EVAPORATOR FAN. NOMINAL 1ONS TONS 5 6 SUPPLY AIR RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT SECTION CFM 2,000 2,400 OUTSIDE AIR ® CFM 200 240 EXT. STATIC PRESSURE EVAPORATOR FAN IN. H2O .6 .6 MOTOR H.P. 1.5 2.5 POWER VOLT/O 208/3 208/3 NUMBER COMPRESSORS NUMBER 3 3 POWER VOLT/B 208/3 208/3 LRA/RLA EACH 114/16.0 146/23.6 a @ KW ELECTRIC HEAT KW 12 15.8 POWER VOLT/O 208/3 208/3 STAGING NUMBER 2 3 FILTER TYPE 2"-30/. 2"-30X TOTAL COOLING CAPACITY BTUH 60,900 78,200 SENSIBLE COOLING CAPACITY BTUH 45,300 57,600 ENT. AIR TEMP. (DB/WB) C C 00 •F/°F 80/67 80/67 MIN. SEER OR EER (ARI) 0 mLL 9.7 9.0 AMBIENT TEMP. (DB/WB) •F/°F 95/80 95/80 UNIT WEIGHT W/ CURB LBS. 510 570 MANUFACTURER CARRIER CARRIER MODEL N0, 50TFF006 50TFF007 MECHANICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 5--�, DUCTWORK, PIPING, OR EQUIPMENT 14 j FLEXIBLE DUCT 5-4-5 DUCTWORK TRANSITION MANUAL NR VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER ® SUPPLY OR OUTSIDE AIR DUCT SECTION RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT SECTION ® SUPPLY AIR DEVICE RETURN AIR DEVICE ® EXHAUST AIR DEVICE ter" UNDERCUT DOOR Y4" O WALL MOUNTED PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT ® SMOKE DETECTOR RGC RETURN GRILLE AT CEILING HVAC PLAN KEY NOTES Q1 UNDER CUT DOOR Y4" O SEE SPLITTER DETAIL ON SHEET M501 O PROVIDE CONDENSATE TRAP AND ROUTE CONDENSATE PIPING TOWARD ROOF DRAIN/ GUTTER AND TERMINATE AT ROOF DRAIN/ GUTTER RE: CONDENSATE DRAIN TRAP DETAIL FOR PIPING SIZE. ® RUN 6" GALV EXHAUST DUCT THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL AND TERMINATE WITH WALL MOUNTED RAIN CAPS. NOTE COORDINATE W/ROOFER TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED CLEARANCES FOR ROOF ACCESS SCUTTLE A-170 RGC T ' ___ ____ A-160 - tlA i 8"DIA 12X12 1014 RGC _ { 10 8 --- III iZ= B-940 R l - 4 • r �R S P...- III\1/I__T_10T_ 14X12 RGC :m RGC IF5 A-170 �8"DIA A-205 8' LL A 10X8 RGC ®EF -1® 8X6 6"DIA JA-50 L=IB I I O A-100 A-250 20X18 I D RTU -2 I 1 I _ -10"DIA- - 1,, l 10"DIA } A-50 A-250 A-210 A-160 B-620 ...-.. 10X8 7RGC 8"DIA (- 1 I I I - - A-165 -- - -- j ®r X50 I 1 ! REAR Mechanical Plan LEFT � RIGHT SCALE 1/4" • T-0" FRONT NOTE: DUCTWORK HAS BEEN LAID OUT TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH LIGHT FIXTURES. COORDINATE W/ ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR, � \ � -___ A ____ --' • �� PRIOR TO START OF WORK a U Q) N Q) 'g -4-icn U) �:;, a @ >04 @ c') LL co c6 L-- C C 00 0 mLL f U a)3 C w 6 �T J U s L U Q� i Cp G c E i cu -o U o co (u co 0-0 n U w 5 V ti a � a � y ern! TE Lo N I I I i LdJ o N C. W N O Z Y y i w AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE 13Y MANUF./CAT. NO. TYPE NECK FRAME REMARKS FINISH A TITUS - OMNI CD 0 - 105 CFM = 6"PND OR 6"x6" 12 X 12 FLANGE DRIVE - 24 X 24 SONES - 3.6 MOTOR WATTS 70 FAN SPEED RPM 110 - 145 CFM = 6"RND OR 6"x6" POWER V/4 120/1 LOCATION - TOILET ROOM MANUFACTURER 24 X 24 COOK MODEL - GC -140 NOTES 150 - 200 CFM = 8"RND OR 8"x8" 1. 2 LAY IN, BAB. WHT. EA. SIDE OF (6 4-1 24 Y 24 ALUMINUM ENAMEL HANGER, EA. SHIM AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL UNIT. 1,/4:' PI ATE OR 205 - 350 CFM = 10"RND OR 10"x1D" a INSULATION STACKED WASHERS IDE OF DUCT 1 355 - 575 CFM = 12"RND OR 12"x12" 24 X 24 1/2"0 BOII NUTS, AND CANT B TITUS -35OFL RAG 22 x 22 (MAX. 1280 CFM) 24 X 24 LAY IN, OBD BAK, WHT SIDL. REQUIRED FOR DUCTWORK MEL LOAD ; " CUL TIONS AND TIE DOWN, 10 x 22 (MAX. 500 Cl 12 X 24 DEVICE TYPE LEGEND: CD = CEILING DIFFUSER RAG = RETURN AIR GRILLE F TYPICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION THE ROOF TOP UNIT SHALL BE STARTED AND STOPPED FROM A ROOM THERMOSTAT. ON A CALL FOR COOLING, THE THERMOSTAT SHALL ENERGIZE THE COMPRESSOR(S) TO MAINTAIN SET POINT. ON A CALL FOR HEATING, THE THERMOSTAT SHALL ENERGIZE THE ELECTRIC HEAT IN STAGE(S) TO MAINTAIN SET POINT. SUPPLY FAN SHALL RUN CONTINUOUSLY DURING_, OCCUPIED HOURS. TURNING VANES (TYPICAL) FAN SCHEDULE TAG - EF -1 SERVICE - CFM EXHAUST 100 AIR QUANTITY EXT. STATIC PRESS. IN, Hz0 0.375 FAN TYPE - CEILING DRIVE - DIRECT SONES - 3.6 MOTOR WATTS 70 FAN SPEED RPM 1500 POWER V/4 120/1 LOCATION - TOILET ROOM MANUFACTURER - COOK MODEL - GC -140 NOTES 12' FABRICATED, MIN 14GA_ 1. 2 1.WITH PLUG-IN DISCONNECT. 2.PROVIDE CONTROL BY MANUAL LIGHT SWITCH WITH 5 MINUTE DELAY. FAN SHALL RUN 5 MINUTES AFTER LIGHT IS OFF. COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF SWITCH. B CFM �� C CFM VARIES VARIES �P,ANSITION 0.25 D (4" M IN. PER SMACNA) _ � RECTANGULAR DUCT BRATICH DUCT BRANCH DUCT c. VOLUME DAMPER CONTROL ROD/ SPLITTER DAMPER, (TYPICAL) Y (TYPICAL) Z CONICAL FITTING WITH LOCKING TYPE VOLUME DAMPER. A (CFM) \� MAIN DUCT X —FLEX DUCT OR ROUND SHEET METAL DUCT. FLEX DUCT MAX. 8'-0' LONG, TO SIZE SPLITTER: USE CLAMP TO ATTACH FLEX DUCTS AND SEAL SUPPORT DUCT EVERY G� Y - (B/A) (X) FOUR FEET FROM STRUCTURE NOTE: FOR RETURN AIR FLOW, Z = X -Y DELETE SPLITTER DAMPER DEPTH REMAINS CONSTANT BRANCH DUCT DETAILS SPLITTER DETAIL SCALE N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. SUPPLY DUCT �P1N-IN F I LNG WITH DA, INSULATED ROUND % FLEXIBLE DUCT (MAX. 8'-0" LONG) SIZE TO MATCH DIFFUSER NECK, ROUND METAL DUCT / _ (EXTERNAL INSULATION) INSULATION CEILING _CEILING DIFFUSER CEILING DIFFUSER RUNOUT DETAIL N.T.S. 2'-B" MAX. TO STRUCTURAL SUPPORTING MEMBER. #1D SEkF TAPPING SHEET METAL SCREWS EQUALLY SPACED (PER SMACNA.)I TYP. 4 SIDES, RETAINING CLIP J 6a C -CLAMP W//RETAINING CLIP 6b C -CLAMP W/LDCK NUT (OPTIONAL) CONNECTIONS TO JOIST ROD ALE N.T.S. *PER S.M.A.C.N.A. TABLE 4— 1 SIDE BRACING FOR PROVIDE CLEANOUT AT EACH CHANGE PROVIDE PLUG OF DIRECTION OR EVERY 30' FOR MAINTENANCE DRAIN LINE. SLOPE A WITH FLOW1//8" FT TO DRAIN GUTT�R A CONDENSATE MAX. TONS PIPE SIZE A = FAN SUCTION PRESSURE T 1 INCH 2 3/4" 5 1" 30 1 1 /d' CONDENSATE DRAIN TRAP DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S ATTACHMENT TO� STRUCTUREALTERNATE LOCATION IS ON TOP OF JOIST SAFETY HANGER CHORD Y ___1"X12 GA WIRE OR 1"X18 GA METAL S RF%P OPEN WEB JOIST UP TO 24"0 CEILIN� CEILING DIFFUSER CEILING MOUNTED AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICE SAFETY SUPPORT DETAIL L OUTSIDE AIR CALCULATION AREA PERSON CFM/PERSON CFM REQUIRE_ OFFICE 25 15 375 PER TABLE 403.3 2001 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE - MECHANICAL CFM SUPPPLIED 440 SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDENSATE PIPING I W). �7 CAREY TREE 2 1/2" 18' x 18" x 1/2 4 /��ROOF SYSTEM CONDENSATE PIPE SUPPORT ON - ROOF SCALE: N.T.S. L 4 c w U ~Q MANUFACTURER'S 2 MA, o 4_4 BOLT z� U � PERIMETER OF CURB COF BOLTS E 'A'L PlIN z °3 GASKET BETWEEN UNIT AND ^w VERTICAL C GOOF ANGLE Q v `v a PENETRATIONS BY HVAC / HANGERS N LONGITUDINAL a U�� O C-4 zw BY ROOFER --12" Q z HORIZONTALCABLE - REATED WOOD NAILER BRACE T, >N �m 12' FABRICATED, MIN 14GA_ AND METAL DECK -� BRACE w EA. SIDE OF (6 4-1 BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR SPACER BLOCK - HANGER, EA. SHIM AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL UNIT. 1,/4:' PI ATE OR U L� a INSULATION STACKED WASHERS IDE OF DUCT 1 IBER, SUPPORT ANGLES 1/2"0 BOII NUTS, AND CANT AS REQUIRED BY WASHERS ON 24" CENTERS. DUCT ___� DUCT SIZE MIN. THREE RLOUIRED PER 2 1 MAX. [-/ TRANSVERSE MIN�CABLE BRACE o SIDL. REQUIRED FOR DUCTWORK NOTE: SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS E)' WIND LOAD ; " CUL TIONS AND TIE DOWN, ALE N.T.S. *PER S.M.A.C.N.A. TABLE 4— 1 SIDE BRACING FOR PROVIDE CLEANOUT AT EACH CHANGE PROVIDE PLUG OF DIRECTION OR EVERY 30' FOR MAINTENANCE DRAIN LINE. SLOPE A WITH FLOW1//8" FT TO DRAIN GUTT�R A CONDENSATE MAX. TONS PIPE SIZE A = FAN SUCTION PRESSURE T 1 INCH 2 3/4" 5 1" 30 1 1 /d' CONDENSATE DRAIN TRAP DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S ATTACHMENT TO� STRUCTUREALTERNATE LOCATION IS ON TOP OF JOIST SAFETY HANGER CHORD Y ___1"X12 GA WIRE OR 1"X18 GA METAL S RF%P OPEN WEB JOIST UP TO 24"0 CEILIN� CEILING DIFFUSER CEILING MOUNTED AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICE SAFETY SUPPORT DETAIL L OUTSIDE AIR CALCULATION AREA PERSON CFM/PERSON CFM REQUIRE_ OFFICE 25 15 375 PER TABLE 403.3 2001 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE - MECHANICAL CFM SUPPPLIED 440 SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDENSATE PIPING I W). �7 CAREY TREE 2 1/2" 18' x 18" x 1/2 4 /��ROOF SYSTEM CONDENSATE PIPE SUPPORT ON - ROOF SCALE: N.T.S. DUCT SIZE MAX. 30" 0 ALIERNATE LOCATION IS ON TOP OF JOIST CHORD OPEN WEB JOIST (2)8 CA. WIRE 1 ' x 20 GA. STRAP +PER S.M.A.C.N.A. TABLE 4-2 MAX MJN 12'-0" SPACING (2)8 GA. WIRE I w � N � � O u x o �5 ROUND DUCT SUPPORT & BRACING DETAIL SCALE: P I.S. - 4'-0" MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SAG 1/2" PER FOOT OF SUPPORT SPACING. -� FLEXIBLE DUCT NOTES 1. DUCT SHOULD EXTEND STRAIGHT FOR SEVERAL INCHES FROM A CONNECTION BEFORE BENDING. 2. SUPPORT SYSTEM MUST NOT DAMAGE DUCT OR CAUSE OUT OF PO,!ND SHAPE. FLEX DUCT SUPPORT SCn_F N.T.S. METAL STRAP 1-1/2" MINIMU _— EDGE OF _o:F IOP UNIT / ROOF CAP HURRICANE CLIP: MICROMETAL-- L 3/8" ROD c w U ~Q MANUFACTURER'S MACHINE o 4_4 BOLT z� U � PERIMETER OF CURB o� z °3 GASKET BETWEEN UNIT AND ^w N C a Q v `v a PENETRATIONS BY HVAC / FLASHING N DUCT SIZE MAX. 30" 0 ALIERNATE LOCATION IS ON TOP OF JOIST CHORD OPEN WEB JOIST (2)8 CA. WIRE 1 ' x 20 GA. STRAP +PER S.M.A.C.N.A. TABLE 4-2 MAX MJN 12'-0" SPACING (2)8 GA. WIRE I w � N � � O u x o �5 ROUND DUCT SUPPORT & BRACING DETAIL SCALE: P I.S. - 4'-0" MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SAG 1/2" PER FOOT OF SUPPORT SPACING. -� FLEXIBLE DUCT NOTES 1. DUCT SHOULD EXTEND STRAIGHT FOR SEVERAL INCHES FROM A CONNECTION BEFORE BENDING. 2. SUPPORT SYSTEM MUST NOT DAMAGE DUCT OR CAUSE OUT OF PO,!ND SHAPE. FLEX DUCT SUPPORT SCn_F N.T.S. METAL STRAP 1-1/2" MINIMU _— EDGE OF _o:F IOP UNIT / ROOF CAP HURRICANE CLIP: MICROMETAL-- L R MICRO -HOLD, INSTALL PER � U FAN MAIN FRAME MANUFACTURER'S i o 4_4 RECOMMENDATIONSFULL U � PERIMETER OF CURB ^, V/ °3 GASKET BETWEEN UNIT AND ^w N C SEALANT AT ALL SCREW Q v `v L PENETRATIONS BY HVAC / FLASHING -E a U�� O C-4 zw BY ROOFER --12" Q z ' - REATED WOOD NAILER BUILT UP ROOF_ >N �m 12' FABRICATED, MIN 14GA_ AND METAL DECK -� co w CURB BY IIVAC INSTALLED (6 4-1 BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR SPACER BLOCK - c: 'c 00 SHIM AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL UNIT. 1,/4:' PI ATE OR U L� a INSULATION STACKED WASHERS 1 IBER, SUPPORT ANGLES 1/2"0 BOII NUTS, AND CANT AS REQUIRED BY WASHERS ON 24" CENTERS. DUCT ___� GENERAL CONTRACTOR MIN. THREE RLOUIRED PER ROOF OPENING AS SIDL. REQUIRED FOR DUCTWORK NOTE: SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS E)' WIND LOAD ; " CUL TIONS AND TIE DOWN, ROOF CURB FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DETAIL ,I F N.T.S. E L R U � N i o 4_4 0 U � Lo ^, V/ °3 dd ^w N C Q •v Q v `v L (n -E a U�� O C-4 zw C rn Q z a E L T L R i w 4_4 O a) Lo ^, V/ 04 a) N J (n -E O C-4 zw C rn Q z @toS O MO >N �m a w � co w (6 4-1 @' w L c: 'c 00 o QLL U L� a C L 1 z e W o @ (o L T L i r i w a) U a) J O C-4 zw C rn Q z Uo O MO CL Z y o a w � i o w (6 4-1 � Cu o-0 w lV i li (D L aT O o U L� a L T "102 i r i w J O C-4 zw C rn Q z V N O MO CL Z y a w � i o V "102 ,t oI NP - 203424- 200424 LOU 1.000-SWY04 82666 AM ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN WRITTEN WITH THE INTENT OF VARIOUS EQUIPMENT BEING INSTALLED. NOT ALL EQUIPMENT MAY BE REQUIRED ON THIS PROJECT. REVIEW POWER, LIGHTING PLANS AND DETAILS FOR ITEMS AND/OR EQUIPMENT THAT WILL APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. REFERENCES UTILIZE THE FOLLOWING ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS FOR DISCERNMENT WITHIN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE IEEE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS ASA AMERICAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION IES ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING MATERIALS NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE CBM CERTIFIED BALLAST MANUFACTURERS NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION EIA ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION ETL ELECTRICAL TESTING LABORATORIES, INC. OSHA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT ICEA INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION UL UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES, INC. SECTION 16010 -GENERAL PROVISIONS THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM READY FOR THE OWNER'S OPERATION, ANY ITEM NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS OR CALLED FOR IN THE SPEC'S BUT IS NORMALLY REQUIRED TO CONFORM WITH THE INTENT, ARE TO BE CONSIDERED A PART OF THE CONTRACT. THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS IS NOT TO SHOW EVERY MINOR DETAIL OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS EXPECTED TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ITEMS FOR A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS, OR IN THEIR OPINION FINDS OMISSIONS OR ERRORS ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, IT IS THEIR RESPONSIBILITY TO BRING IT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY. IF CONTRACTOR PROCEEDS WITH ANY CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITHOUT WRITTEN PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER/ARCHITECT THE CONTRACTOR WILL NOT BE COMPENSATED. ALL MATERIALS USED SHALL BEAR THE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY, INC. LABEL PROVIDED A STANDARD HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED FOR THE MATERIAL BEING USED. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL CONFORM WITH THE LATEST EDITIONS (U.O.N.) OF THE LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES OF THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT, THE SERVING UTILITY COMPANIES, N.F.P.A., NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODES AND ORDINANCES, INCLUDING ALL AMENDMENTS TO THE N.E.C. EQUIPMENT, AND WHERE APPLICABLE, WILL BE LISTED WITH THE UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC., THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY CODE, LIFE SAFETY CODE, AND THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT. THE WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY ESTABLISHED BY THESE DRAWINGS AND SPEC'S SHALL NOT BE REDUCED BY THE ABOVE MENTIONED CODES. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE EQUAL TO OR EXCEED THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF NEMA, IEEE, AND UL. SHOULD ANY CHANGE TO THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS BE REQUIRED TO COMPLY WITH GOVERNMENTAL REGULATIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER PRIOR TO ANY SUCH WORK BEING EXECUTED. ALL LOCAL FEES, PERMITS, AND REQUIRED INSURANCE FOR PROTECTION AGAINST PUBLIC LIABILITY OF PROPERTY DAMAGE OR THE DURATION OF THE WORK, AND SERVICES OF INSPECTION AND TESTING AUTHORITIES SHALL BE OBTAINED AND PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN HIS BID ANY COSTS TO BE INCURRED RELATIVE TO POWER SERVICE (PRIMARY AND/OR SECONDARY)AND TELEPHONE SERVICE. CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE FULLY WITH THE LOCAL COMPANIES WITH RESPECT TO THEIR SERVICES. BIDDERS ARE TO SATISFY THEMSELVES AS TO THE NATURE AND SCOPE OF WORK BY VISITING THE SITE AND FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE SUBMISSION OF A BID WILL BE EVIDENCE THAT SUCH AN EXAMINATION HAS BEEN MADE. LATER CLAIMS FOR LABOR, EQUIPMENT, OR MATERIALS REQUIRED, OR FOR DIFFICULTIES ENCOUNTERED WHICH COULD HAVE BEEN FORESEEN BY AN EXAMINATION OF THE SITE PRIOR TO THE BID WILL NOT BE ALLOWED. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN A FIRST CLASS WORKMANLIKE MANNER, AND BE INSTALLED BY A LICENSED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CERTAIN MATERIALS WILL BE PROVIDED BY OTHER TRADES. EXAMINE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TO ASCERTAIN THESE REQUIREMENTS. CAREFULLY CHECK SPACE REQUIREMENTS WITH OTHER TRADES AND THE PHYSICAL CONFINES OF THE AREA TO INSURE THAT ALL MATERIAL CAN BE INSTALLED IN THE SPACES ALLOTTED THERETO INCLUDING FINISHED SUSPENDED CEILINGS. MAKE MODIFICATIONS THERETO AS REQUIRED AND APPROVED. TRANSMIT TO OTHER TRADES ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR WORK TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE SECTIONS IN AMPLE TIME FOR INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ORDER THE PROGRESS OF HIS WORK TO CONFORM TO THE PROGRESS Of THE WORK OF THE OTHER TRADES AND SHALL COMPLETE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION AS SOON AS THE CONDITIONS OF THE BUILDING WILL PERMIT. ANY COST RESULTING FROM THE DEFECTIVE OF ILL-TIMED WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS SECTION SHALL BE BORNE BY THE CONTRACTOR, ANY CORRECTIONS OF DEFECTS TO BE COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITHOUT ADDITIONAL CHARGE AND TO INCLUDE REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF ANY OTHER PHASE OF THE INSTALLATION WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN DAMAGED THEREBY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SHIPPING AND STORING OF ALL PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS IN A MANNER THAT WILL PROTECT THEM FROM DAMAGE AND WEATHER. IF ITEMS ARE DAMAGED, TAKE IMMEDIATE STEPS TO OBTAIN REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR. ANY SUCH REPAIRS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR SHALL STORE MATERIALS IN SUITABLE SHELTER FROM THE ELEMENTS, BUT READILY ACCESSIBLY FOR INSPECTION BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER UNTIL INSTALLED. STORE ALL ITEMS SUBJECT TO MOISTURE DAMAGE IN DRY, HEATED SPACES. PROVIDE SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS REQUIRED FOR SUPPORT OF THE WORK. FURNISH AND SET ALL SLEEVES FOR PASSAGE OF RACEWAYS THROUGH STRUCTURAL. MASONRY AND CONCRETE WALLS OF FLOORS AND ELSEWHERE AS WILL BE REQUIRED FOR THE PROPER PROTECTION OF EACH RACEWAY PASSING THROUGH BUILDING SURFACES. IF WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT IS TO BE SECURED TO WALLS THE USE OF STEEL BOLTS ARE TO BE USED TO MAINTAIN AT LEAST P' AIR SPACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTING WALL. GROUPS OF EQUIPMENT MAY BE MOUNTED ON ADEQUATELY SIZED STEEL ANGLES, CHANNELS, OR BARS. PREFABRICATED STEEL CHANNELS PROVIDING A HIGH DEGREE OF MOUNTING FLEXIBILITY, SUCH AS THOSE MANUFACTURED BY GLOB-STRUTT, KINDORF, AND UNISTRUT, MAY BE USED FOR MOUNTING GROUPS OF EQUIPMENT. AN ACCURATE RECORD OF ALL DEVIATIONS SHALL BE KEPT AS TO THE WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND THAT WHICH IS ACTUALLY INSTALLED SO THAT A SET OF AS BUILT DRAWINGS CAN BE MADE BY CONTRACTOR, WERE UPON COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT BY THE OWNER,A NEAT AND LEGIBLE SET OF PRINTS CAN BE DELIVERED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF ONE (1) YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER, EXCEPT THAT WHERE GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES FOR LONGER TERMS ARE SPECIFIED. WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER NOTIFICATION, CORRECT ANY DEFICIENCIES THAT OCCUR DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER, ALL TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER. OBTAIN SIMILAR GUARANTEES FROM SUB- CONTRACTORS, MANUFACTURERS, SUPPLIERS AND SUBTRADE SPECIALISTS. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AT THE SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION WITH THE LOCAL POWER COMPANY TO RELATE WORK WITH THE UTILITY COMPANY'S RESPONSIBILITIES TO MEET THE OWNERS SCHEDULE. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUBMITTALS FOR SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT SUCH AS SITE LIGHTING, LIGHT FIXTURES, SWITCHGEAR, WIRING DEVICES, EMERGENCY GENERATOR/TRANSFER EQUIPMENT, AND ALL SYSTEMS (FIRE ALARM, SECURITY ETC.) TEN 10) DAYS PRIOR TO BID DATE (TWO COPIES) FOR ENGINEERS APPROVAL TO SUBMIT. ENGINEER'S APPROVAL OF THE PRIOR APPROVAL PACKAGE WILL BE CONSIDERED PRELIMINARY. FINAL APPROVAL WILL BE CONTINGENT UPON REVIEW OF FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS. ALL PROPOSED ALTERNATES MUST BE INDUSTRY STANDARD EQUALS TO THE ITEMS SPECIFIED AS THE BASIS OF DESIGN; HOWEVER, IF THE ITEMS ARE NOT CONSIDERED EQUAL BY THE ENGINEER, IT SHALL BE DISAPPROVED FOR FINAL SUBMITTAL. IF ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR/GENERAL CONTRACTOR DOES NOT SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER FOR ITEMS LISTED ABOVE, ELECTRICAL ENGINEER WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY, AND OR OMISSIONS OR ERRORS DUE TO SHOP DRAWINGS NOT SUBMITTED. SHOP DRAWINGS WILL ONLY BE REVIEWED TWICE AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT. ADDITIONAL SHOP DRAWING REVIEWS SHALL BE INVOICED AT $85.00 PER HOUR, BILLABLE TO THE SUBCONTRACTOR, C.O.D. ALTERNATE SITE FIXTURES SHALL INCLUDE A COMPUTER GENERATED POINT-TO-POINT PHOTOMETRIC CALCULATION BASED ON THE PLANS (FIXTURE CHARACTERISTICS AND POLE PLACEMENT SHALL NOT BE ALTERED). THIS DIAGRAM SHALL SHOW COMPOSITE VALUES OF THE ILLUMINANCE PROJECTED FROM THE ARRANGEMENT OF LIGHT SOURCES AS SHOWN ON PLAN. COMPUTER PLOT DIAGRAM SHALL ALSO SHOW THE LOCATIONS OF THE POLES, SPACING BETWEEN POLES,THE MOUNTING HEIGHT USED IN THE CALCULATIONS, AND THE FIXTURE CATALOG NUMBER BEING USED. A COMPLETE SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE JOB SITE WITH COLORED MARKINGS INDICATING PROGRESS OR WORK. THIS SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS IS TO BE SEPARATE FROM AND IN ADDITION TO CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SET. EVERY UNIT OF EQUIPMENT, DEVICE, CONDUIT AND WIRE IS TO BE MARKED WHEN INSTALLED. USE GREEN TO INDICATE INSTALLATION AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND USE RED TO INDICATED FIELD CHANGES. UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, THIS SET OF CONTRACT DRAWINGS IS TO BE TURNED OVER TO, AND BECOME PROPERTY OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER, THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THE DRAWINGS FROM TIME TO TIME TO INDICATE CHANGES IN THE WORK. WHEN REVISED DRAWINGS AND/OR ANY REVISIONS ARE ISSUED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EVALUATE THE CHANGES PROMPTLY, BEFORE INSTALLATION OF ANY ITEM OR PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK INDICATED BY THE REVISED DRAWING OR REVISIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN WRITING THAT THE REVISED DRAWINGS INVOLVE AN ADDITION OR DEDUCTION OF A SPECIFIC AMOUNT OF MONEY TO THE CONTRACT PRICE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT PROCEED WITH THE REVISED WORK WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER/ OWNER OF THE COST OF THE REVISED WORK. ALL LOAD DATA HAS BEEN BASED ON INFORMATION GIVEN ENGINEER/ARCHITECT AT THE TIME OF DESIGN. VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE RATINGS BEFORE ORDERING. FURNISH AND INSTALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES, WIRING AND CONNECTIONS ON AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AS SHOWN ON PLANS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR REGARDING SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF ALL REQUIRED CONTROLS. SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES STANDARDS - EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BY GOVERNING CODES AND BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENT S, COMPLY WITH THE LATEST APPLICABLE PROVISIONS AND LATEST RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE FOLLOWING; 1. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT 3. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING a) U.L. STANDARD UL -6 a) U.L. STANDARD UL -7971 b) A.N.S.I. C80-1 b) A.N.S.I. C80-3 c) FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW -C -581E c) FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW -C-563 2. INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT 4. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT a) U.L. STANDARD UL -1242 a) U.L. STANDARD UL -1 b) FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW -C -581E 5. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 6. NON-METALLIC CONDUIT a) U.l. STANDARD UL -360 a) U.L. STANDARD UL -651 c) N.E.M.A. STANDARD TC -2 7. WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS b) A.N.S.I. STANDARD F512 d) FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS a)U.L.STANDARD UL -870 GSA -FSS AND W -C -1094-A DO NOT USE ALUMINUM CONDUIT FOR ANY PURPOSES. RACEWAY TYPES STANDARD THREADED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT. 1. RIGID CONDUIT HEAVY WALL GALVANIZED. 2. THREADED TYPE FITTINGS: ERICKSON COUPLINGS WHERE THREADED CANNOT BE USED. INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT 1. LIGHT WEIGHT RIGID STEEL CONDUIT. 2. THREADED TYPE FITTINGS: ERICKSON COUPLINGS WHERE THREADED CANNOT BE USED. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING 1. CONTINUOUS, SEAMLESS TUBING, GALVANIZED OR SHERADIZED ON THE EXTERIOR, COATED ON THE INTERIOR WITH A SMOOTH HARD FINISH OF LACQUER, VARNISH, OR ENAMEL. 2. COUPLINGS AND CONNECTORS: a) INDOOR AND TWO (29 INCHES IN SIZE AND SMALLER, SHALL BE STEEL SET -SCREW TYPE FITTINGS. b) 2�/Z" SIZE AND LARGER MUST EMPLOY STEEL COMPRESSION GLAND FITTINGS. c) OUTDOOR SHALL BE RAINTIGHT STEEL COMPRESSION GLAND FITTINGS. 3. INDENT TYPE FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. ALL CONNECTORS SHALL HAVE INSULATED THROAT. 5. WHERE INSTALLED IN SLAB OR CONCRETE WORK, PROVIDE APPROVED CONCRETE TIGHT FITTINGS. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT 1. SINGLE STRIP, CONTINUOUS, FLEXIBLE INTERLOCKED, DOUBLE -WRAPPED STEEL, GALVANIZED INSIDE AND OUTSIDE, FORMING SMOOTH INTERNAL WIRING CHANNEL. 2. MAXIMUM LENGTH (SIX 6) FEET. 3, EACH SECTION OF RACEWAY MUST CONTAN AN EQUIPMENT GROUNDING WIRE BONDED AT EACH END AND SIZED AS REQUIRED. PROVIDE CONNECTORS WITH INSULATING BUSHINGS. 4. STEEL SQUEEZE -TYPE OR STEEL SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT 1. SAME AS FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT EXCEPT WITH TOUGH, INSERT WATER -TIGHT PLASTIC OUTER JACKET. 2. CAST MALLEABLE IRON BODY AND GLAND NUT, CADMIUM PLATED WITH ONE-PIECE BRASS GROUNDING BUSHINGS WHICH TREAD TO INTERIOR OF CONDUIT. SPIRAL MOLDED VINYL SEALING RING BETWEEN GLAND NUT AND BUSHING AND NYLON INSULATED THROAT. NON-METALLIC RACEWAY 1. COMPOSED OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE SUITABLE FOR 90 DEGREES C. 2. RACEWAY, FITTINGS, AND CEMENT MUST BE PRODUCED BY THE SAME MANUFACTURER WHO MUST HAVE HAD A MINIMUM OF TEN (10) YEARS EXPERIENCE IN MANUFACTURING THE PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS MUST HAVE A TENSILE STRENGTH OF 7,000-7,200 PSI AT 73.4 DEGREES F., FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF 12,000 PSI AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 9,000 PSI. 4. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE SOLVENT CEMENTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE MANUFACTURER. ALL UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3'4" GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT OR SCHEDULE 40 PVC. ALL OTHER RACEWAYS TO COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES. WHERE RIGID STEEL CONDUIT IS USED, IT SHALL BE COMPLETELY COATED WITH AN ALKALI AND RUST RESISTANT BITUMASTIC PAINT, KOPPER NO. 50, AND THREADS SHALL BE COATED WITH ZINC CHROMATE. RIGID STEEL SHALL ALSO BE USED WHEN CONDUIT IS EXPOSED TO EXTERIOR ENVIRONMENT SUCH AS EXTERIOR OF BUILDING OR WHERE IT IS EXPOSED AND SUBJECT TO DAMAGE, INSIDE OF BUILDING. ALL BOXES SHALL BE RECESSED (FLUSH) IN WALLS OR CEILINGS WHENEVER POSSIBLE. RACEWAYS IN HUNG CEILING SHALL BE RUN ON AND SECURED TO SLAB OR PRIMARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OF CEILING, NOT TO LATHING CHANNELS OR T-BARS,Z-BARS, OR OTHER ELEMENTS WHICH ARE THE DIRECT SUPPORTS OF THE CEILING PANELS, SECURE CONDUIT FIRMLY TO STEEL BY CLIPS AND FITTINGS DESIGNED FOR THAT PURPOSE. INSTALL AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE, BUT NOT LESS THAN P-0" ABOVE HUNG CEILINGS. SUPPORT RACEWAYS AT INTERVALS NO GREATER THAN TEN (10)FEET AND WITH ONE SUPPORT WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF EACH COUPLING, BOX, FITTING, OR OUTLET BOX. PROVIDE ONE SUPPORT WITHIN THREE (3) FEET OF EACH ELBOW OR BEND. OUTLET, JUNCTION, AND PULL BOXES CAST TYPE CONDUIT BOXES, OUTLET BODIES AND FITTINGS 1. PROVIDE SURFACE MOUNTED OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES, IN INDOOR LOCATIONS, WHERE EXPOSED TO MOISTURE AND IN OUTDOOR LOCATIONS. 2. USE FERROUS ALLOY BOXES AND CONDUIT BODIES WITH RIGID STEEL OR IMC. 3. COVERS: CAST OR SHEET METAL UNLESS OTHERWISE REQUIRED. 4.TAPERED THREADS FOR HUBS. GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL OUTLET BOXES 1. GENERAL a) PRESSED STEEL, GALVANIZED OR CADMIUM -PLATED, MINIMUM OF FOUR (49 INCHES, OCTAGONAL OR SQUARE. WITH GALVANIZED COVER OR EXTENSION RING AS REQUIRED. 2. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE BOX, INDOORS a) NOMINAL FOUR (49 INCH SQUARE, 1-1/2" OR 2-1/8" DEEP AS REQUIRED, WITH RAISED COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. GANGABLE BOXES SHALL NOT BE USED. 3. TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX, INDOORS a) NOMINAL FOUR (4") INCH SQUARE, 2-1/8" DEEP, WITH RAISED COVER UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. GANGABLE BOXES SHALL NOT BE USED. 4. LIGHTING FIXTURE BOX a) FOUR (4") INCH OCTAGON WITH %" FIXTURE STUD. b) FOR SUSPENDED CEILING WORK, FOUR (49 INCH OCTAGON WITH REMOVABLE BACKPLATE WHERE REQUIRED, ANDTWO (2)PARALLEL BARS FOR SECURING TO THE CROSS -FURRING CHANNELS AND EXTEND FLEXIBLE CONDUIT TO EACH FIXTURE. 5. PLUG ANY OPEN KNOCKOUTS NOT UTILIZED. BACK-TO-BACK OUTLETS IN THE SAME WALL, OR "THRU-WALL" TYPE BOXES ARE NOT PERMITTED. PROVIDE TWELVE (12') INCHES (MINIMUM) SPACING FOR OUTLETS SHOWN ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF A COMMON WALL TO MINIMIZE SOUND TRANSMISSION. PROVIDE TWENTY FOUR (24") INCH (MINIMUM) HORIZONTAL SPACING FOR OUTLETS SHOWN ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF A FIRE RATED WALL TO MAINTAIN FIRE RATING. ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN AN APPROVED RACEWAY, EMT, IMC, RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT OR SCHED. 40 P.V.C. THERE SHALL BE NO TYPE NM, MC, ELECTRICAL NON-MATALLIC TUBING, AND FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT USED FOR BRANCH CIRCUITING. MAXIMUM NUMBER OF 120V CIRCUITS ALLOWED IN A COMMON CONDUIT SHALL BE SIX (6). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL STRICTLY CONFORM TO THE N.E.C. REQUIREMENTS OF DERATING FOR CONDUCTOR AMPACITY AND CONDUIT FILL. NO CONDUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED EXPOSED ON ROOF. SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE PRODUCTS CONDUCTOR 1. ELECTRICAL GRADE ANNEALED COPPER, TINNED IF RUBBER INSULATED, AND FABRICATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM STANDARDS. MINIMUM SIZE #12 FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS AND #14 FOR CONTROL WIRING. 2. THE CONDUCTORS ILLUSTRATED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE COPPER. STRANDING 1. 012 AND 010 SOLID. 2. CABLES LARGER THAN +10, STRANDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM CLASS B STRANDING DESIGNATIONS. 3. CONTROL WIRES STRANDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM CLASS B STRANDING DESIGNATIONS INSULATED SINGLE CONDUCTORS 1. TYPE THHN/THWN - FLAME RETARDANT: HEAT -RESISTANT THERMOPLASTIC INSULATION. NYLON JACKET RATED FOR 90 C DRY/75C WET OPERATION. USE FOR BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING. 2. USE TYPE THHN/THWN OR RHW OR XHHW, RATED FOR 90 C, FOR FEEDER CIRCUITS. COLOR CODING 1. PROVIDE CONSISTENT COLOR CODING OF ALL CIRCUITS AS FOLLOWS: a)120/208 VOLTS CODE b) 277/480 VOLT CODE D PHASE A - BLACK i) PHASE A - BROWN ii) PHASE B - RED ii) PHASE B - ORANGE iii) PHASE C - BLUE iii) PHASE C - YELLOW iv) NEUTRAL - WHITE iv) NEUTRAL - WHITE v) GROUND - GREEN v) GROUND - GREEN 2. COLOR -CODE WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MECHANICAL AND/OR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WIRING DIAGRAMS FURNISHED WITH THE EQUIPMENT. FACTORY COLOR CODE WIRE NUMBER 6 AND SMALLER. WIRE NUMBER 4 AND LARGER MAY BE COLOR CODED BY COLOR TAPPING OF THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE EXPOSED ENDS. CONNECTORS 1. MAKE CONNECTIONS, SPLICES, AND TAPS AND JOINTS WITH SOLDERLESS DEVICES, MECHANICALLY AND ELECTRICALLY SECURE. PROTECT EXPOSED WIRES AND CONNECTING DEVICES WITH ELECTRICAL TAPE OR INSULATION TO PROVIDE PROTECTION NOT LESS THAN THAT OF THE CONDUCTOR. 2. ELECTRICAL TAPE SHALL BE SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE AS INSULATING TAPE. SUPER 334 SCOTCH VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE AS MANUFACTURED BY 3M SHALL BE EQUAL. 3. USE LUBRICANT WHERE THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE TO CONDUCTORS EXISTS. USE ONLY A LUBRICANT APPROVED BY THE CPBLE MANUFACTURER AND ONE WHICH IS COMPATIBLE WITH CABLE AND RACEWAYS. EXECUTION WIRE AND CABLE 1. USE #12 AWG MINIMUM FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS WHOSE LENGTH FROM THE PANEL TO FURTHEST OUTLET DOES NOT EXCEED 100' (HORIZONTAL RUN) FOR 120 -VOLT CIRCUITS OR 200' FOR 277 -VOLT CIRCUITS. USE #10 AWG OR LARGER FOR LONGER RUNS. 2. FLASHOVER OR INSULATION VALUE OF JOINTS SHALL BE EQUAL TO THAT OF THE CONDUCTOR. PROVIDE UNDERWRITERS'LABORATORIES LISTED CONNECTORS RATED TO 600 VOLTS FOR GENERAL USE AND 1,000 VOLTS FOR USE BETWEEN BALLASTS AND LAMPS OR GASEOUS DISCHARGE FIXTURES. 3. USE TIGHT TERMINATING FITTINGS, CONNECTORS, ETC., OF A TYPE SUITABLE FOR THE SPECIFIED CABLE FURNISHED. MAKE BENDS IN CABLE AT TERMINATION PRIOR TO INSTALLING COMPRESSION DEVICE. 4. EXTEND WIRE SIZING FOR THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF A CIRCUIT, FEEDER, ETC. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. GENERAL INSTALLATION 1. PROVIDE TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIALS TO PULL ALL WIRE AND CABLE INTO PLACE AND TO MAKE REQUIRED SPLICES AND TERMINATION. 2. WIRE AND CABLE IN CONDUIT, DUCT OR WIREWAY a) UTILIZE ROLLER BEARING SWIVEL TO PREVENT TWISTING OF CABLE ENTERING CONDUIT OR DUCT. b) TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID ENTRANCE OF DIRT AND WATER INTO CONDUIT AND DUCTS. a) CLEAN EXISTING CONDUITS AND DUCTS TO REMOVE ANY PULLING COMPOUND PRIOR TO PULLING NEW CABLES. d) DO NOT DAMAGE CONDUCTOR INSULATION, BRAID JACKET OR SHEATH. e)DO NOT BEND CONDUCTOR TO LESS THAN MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED RADUIS. D MAKE SPLICES ONLY IN PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES AND OUTLET BOXES. g) UTILIZE CABLE REELS ON JACKS FOR PULLING THROUGH PULL BOXES, DUCTS AND CONDUITS SO BENDS WILL NOT BE EXCESSIVE AND CONDUCTORS WILL NOT TOUCH SHARP EDGES; USE FEEDING TUBE WHERE REQUIRED, h) FOR LARGE DIAMETER CABLES, UTILIZE PROPERLY SIZED PULLING GRIPS. D DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED PULLING TENSION OF WIRE AND CABLE. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. TEST SYSTEM WIRING FOR CONTINUITY, GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS PRIOR TO CONNECTION OF ANY EQUIPMENT. 2. TEST FINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS FOR CONTINUITY OF GROUNDS AND SHORT CIRCUITS. 3. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF FEEDERS AND SUBFEEDERS. a) TEST WITH MEGGER FOR INSULATION RESISTANCE. c) DEMONSTRATE INSTALLATION IS FREE OF GROUNDS b) CORRECT FAULTS AND REPLACE SECTIONS WITH AND SHORT CIRCUITS AND THAT INSULATION FAULTY INSULATION. RESISTANCE COMPLIES WITH ICEA VALUES 4. TEST DIRECT BURIAL CABLES AFTER COMPLETION OF BACKFILLING. SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES EXECUTION SWITCHES 1. PROVIDE SPECIFICATION GRADE, FLUSH MOUNTING, QUIET -OPERATING AC TYPE, WITH TOGGLE OPERATOR, HEAT - RESISTANT PLASTIC HOUSING AND SELF GROUNDING METAL STRAP. SILVER OR SILVER ALLOY CONTACT. DESIGN FOR SIDE OR BACK WIRING WITH UP TO NUMBER 10 WIRE. VERIFIED BY UL TO MEET OR EXCEED FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WS -896E. USE SINGLE -POLE, DOUBLE -POLE, 3 -WAY, 4 -WAY, LIGHTED, PILOT OR KEYED TYPE, AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS OR REQUIRED. PROVIDE IVORY COLOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE SWITCHES ARE INDICATED TO BE INSTALLED NEAR DOORS, CORNER WALLS, ETC. MOUNT SAME NOT LESS THAN 2" AND NOT MORE THAN 18" FROM TRIM. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH THE ARCHITECT. 3. CAREFULLY COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF SWITCHES TO ENSURE LOCATIONS AT THE STRIKE SIDE OF DOORS. 4. FURNISH AND INSTALL AN ENGRAVED LEGEND FOR EACH SWITCH THAT CONTROLS EXHAUST FANS, MOTORS, EQUIPMENT SYSTEMS, ETC., NOT LOCATED WITHIN SIGHT OF THE CONTROLLING SWITCH. RECEPTACLES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, MOUNT RECEPTACLE VERTICALLY WITH U -SHAPED GROUND POSITION ON BOTTOM. ALL GENERAL PURPOSE SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. CATALOG NUMBERS LISTED ARE LEVITON: HOWEVER, COMPARABLE DEVICES BY PASS & SEYMOUR, BRYANT, OR ARROW HART WILL BE ACCEPTED. COLOR OF DEVICES AND PLATES SHALL BE DICTATED BY ARCHITECT/OWNER. A. SWITCHES LEVITON •CSB) -201 B. RECEPTACLES LEVITON •BR20-1 C. COVER PLATES: SMOOTH PLASTIC NOTE ALL OTHER REQUIRED DEVICES SHALL MATCH IN COLOR AND STYLE. GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTERS 1. SWAB ALL CONDUITS CLEAR OF MOISTURE 2. DO NOT COMBINE G.F.I. PROTECTED CIRCUITS WITH OTHER CIRCUITS IN SAME RACEWAY. 3. LIMIT MAXIMUM NUMBER OF G.F.I. PROTECTED CIRCUITS IN ANY ONE RACEWAY TO A MAXIMUM OF ONE CIRCUIT. 4. GFCI DEVICES SHALL BE ARRANGED TO BE EASILY LOCATED a)LABEL DOWNSTREAM RECEPTACLES TO INDICATE THE GFCI LOCATION WHERE RECEPTACLES ARE MORE THAN 20' FROM THE GFCI DEVICE. b) GFCIDEVICES LOCATED IN RESTROOMS SHALL NOT FEED THROUGH TO PROTECT DEVICES IN OTHER ROOMS, SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS NAMEPLATES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, NAMEPLATES SHALL BE BLACK LAMACOID PLATES WITH WHITE ENGRAVED UPPER CASE LETTERS ENCLOSED BY WHITE BORDER ON BEVELED EDGES. 2. NAMEPLATES FOR EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIED BY THE EMERGENCY SYSTEM, SHALL BE RED LAMACOID WITH WHITE LETTERING. 3. ALL NAMEPLATES SHALL BE ENGRAVED AND MUST BE SECURED WITH RIVETS, BRASS OR CADMIUM PLATE SCREWS, THE USE OF DYMO TAPE OR THE LIKE IS UNACCEPTABLE. CABLE TAGS AND WIRE IDENTIFICATION LABELS 1. CABLE TAGS SHALL BE FLAMEPROOF SECURED WITH NYLON TIES. 2. WIRE MARKERS SHALL BE PREPRINGTED CLOTH TAPE TYPE OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 3. LABEL DESIGNATIONS, NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGES APPLIED TO THE COVERS OF ALL MEDIUM AND LOW VOLTAGE PULL, SPLICE AND JUNCTION BOXES. EXECUTION SWITCHBOARDS. 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A MASTER NAMEPLATE FOR EACH SWITCHBOARD, ENGRAVED WITH THE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. MOUNT AT TOP OF INCOMING SECTION. 2. PROVIDE ON EACH MAIN SWITCH AN IDENTIFYING NAMEPLATE. PANELBOARDS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A NAMEPLATE FOR EACH PANFLBOARD AND LOAD CENTER ENGRAVED WITH THE IDENTIFICATION INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. MJUNT AT TOP OF PANEL. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A NAMEPLATE FOR EACH DISCONNECT SWITCH ENGRAVED WITH EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION WHICH THE DISCONNECT SERVES, SECTION 16431 - SWITCHBOARDS PRODUCTS APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. ALL SWITCHBOARDS ARE TO BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER AS THE PANELBOARDS 2. SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE PRODUCTS BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS: a) SQUARE D c) GENERAL ELECTRIC b) CUTLER -HAMMER d) SIEMENSITE RATINGS 1. THE ASSEMBLY SHALL BE RATED TO WITHSTAND MECHANICAL FORCES EXERTED DURING SHORT CIRCUIT CONDITIONS WHEN CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO A POWER SOURCE HAVING AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ENCLOSURES 1. PROVIDE NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES WHERE LOCATED INDOORS IN DRY LOCATIONS. 2.PROVICE NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES WHERE LOCATED OUTDOORS AND LOCATIONS SUBJECT TO THE ELEMENTS. FINISH 1, ALL EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR STEEL SURFACES OF THE SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE PROPERLY CLEANED AND PROVIDED W/ A RUST -INHIBITING PHOSPHATIZED COATING. COLOR AND FINISH OF INDOOR SWITCHBOARDS SHALL BE ANSI 61 LIGHT GRAY. 2. OUTDOOR SWITCHBOARD SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH THE BUILDING. SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING SUBMITTALS 1. SUBMIT TEST REPORTS CERTIFYING RESISTANCE VALUES FOR BURIED OR DRIVEN GROUNDS AND WATER PIPE GROUNDS. PRODUCTS MATERIALS 1. GROUND CABLES: GREEN COLOR CODED, INSULATED, ANNEALED STRANDED TINNED COPPER WIRE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2. GROUND RODS: a) COPPER -CLAD STEEL FABRICATED b) DIAMETER: %". USE %4" FOR ROCKY SOIL. BY MOLTEN WELDING PROCESS. c) LENGTH: 10 FEET. GENERAL 1. ALL GROUND WIRES AND BONDING JUMPERS SHALL BE STRANDED COPPER INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. ALL GROUND WIRES SHALL BE WITHOUT JOINTS AND SPLICES OVER ITS ENTIRE LENGTH. 2. THE SYSTEM NEUTRAL SHALL BE GROUNDED AT THE SERVICE ENTRANCE ONLY, AND KEPT ISOLATED FOR GROUNDING SYSTEMS THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING. 3. EACH SYSTEM OF CONTINUOUS METALLIC PIPING AND DUCTWORK SHALL BE GROUNDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. 4. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BONDED TO THE BUILDING DQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM. THIS SHALL INCLUDE BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, FANS, PUMPS, CHILLERS, ETC, 5. PVC CONDUITS AND PORTIONS OF METALLIC PIPING AND DUCT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE ISOLATED BY FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS, INSULATED COUPLINGS, ETC., SHALL BE BONDED TO THE EQUIPMENT GROUND WITH A FLEXIBLE BONDING JUMPER, OR SEPARATE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS 1. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS AND BE GROUNDED TO BUILDING STEEL, COLD WATER PIPES, ETC., OR AN ALTERNATE GROUNDING MEANS. 2.A SEPARATE, GREEN TYPE THW COPPER GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE RUN FROM GROUND LUG OF EACH GROUNDED RECEPTACLE TO AN APPROVED CONNECTION INSIDE THE ENCLOSING STEEL OUTLET BOX. DEVICE MOUNTING SCREWS SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED AN APPROVED GROUND. 3.A SEPARATE GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED IN EVERY CONDUIT AND RACEWAY AND SECURELY BONDED IN AN APPROVED GROUNDING TERMINAL AT BOTH ENDS OF THE RUN. THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE SIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 250 OF THE N.E.C.. CONTRACTOR SHALL SIZE CONDUIT TO ACCOMMODATE ADDITIONAL CONDUCTOR. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES 1. ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES GROUND LUG SHALL NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE RESPECTIVE OUTLET BOXES, 2. PROVIDE INSULATED GROUND WIRE FOR EACH ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLE. GROUND WIRE SHALL SERVE ONLY THOSE RECEPTACLES WHICH ARE ISOLATED. ROUTE GROUND CONDUCTOR TOGETHER WITH PHASE AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS IN A COMMON RACEWAY. 3. TERMINATE ISOLATED GROUND WIRE AT THE GROUND FROM THE SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM SERVING THE RECEPTACLES. GROUND CONDUCTORS 1. SIZE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR AS REQUIRED BY NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. SECTION 16460 - NOT USED SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS GENERAL 1. ALL SWITCHGEAR, PANELS, STARTERS, CONTACTORS ETC., SHALL BE THE PRODUCT OF A SINGLE MANUFACTURER, THE SYSTEM DESIGN IS BASED ON SQUARE "D"; HOWEVER, COMPARABLE EQUIPMENT BY G.E., & SEIMENS ONLY WILL BE ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATES. TANDEM AND HALF -SPACE CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL NOT BE USED. 2. ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE DESIGNED AND SERIES RATED, AS PER SQUARE "D" SPECIFICATIONS. IF AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER IS SUBSTITUTED, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROPERLY SERIES RATE ALL PANELS. 3. TYPEWRITTEN CIRCUIT INDEX SHALL BE AFFIXED TO INSIDE SURFACE OF EACH PANELBOARD DOOR, CLEARLY INDICATING AREA AND TYPE OF LOAD SERVED BY EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICE, INCLUDING SPARES. HAND PRINTED WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 4. ENGRAVED, LAMINATED PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION PLATES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ON ALL PANELS AND SWITCHGEAR. PLATES SHALL BE AFFIXED TO FRONT OF PANELS, INDICATING PANEL NAME, VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE. EXECUTION INSTALLATION 1. MOUNT ALL PANELS AT A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 6 FEET 6 INCHES TO TOP UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, 2. WHERE FLUSHED MOUNTED, THE FIRE INTEGRITY OF THE WALL IN WHICH IT IS INSTALLED MUST BE MAINTAINED. 3. NEATLY ARRANGE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRES AND TIE TOGETHER IN EACH GUTTER WITH THOMAS &BETTS NYLON "TY -RAPS", OR APPROVED EQUAL AT MINIMUM 4 INCH INTERVALS. 4. PLUG ALL KNOCKOUTS REMOVED AND NOT UTILIZED. 5. PROVIDE NAMEPLATE AND FILL OUT PANEL DIRECTORY. FOR REMODAL WORK OR CHANGES, TRACE CIRCUITS TO DETERMINE LOADS AND PROVIDE NEW UPDATED DIRECTORY. TOUCH UP AND CLEANING 1. VACUUM ALL BACKBOXES CLEAN OF DEBRIS AFTER INSTALLATION AND PRIOR TO CONTRACT CLOSEOUT. 2. TOUCH UP SCRATCH MARKS, ETC. WITH MATCHING PAINT. SECTION 16475 - FUSES 600V AND LESS GENERAL 1. ALL FUSES FOR SAFETY SWITCHES SHALL BE DUAL ELEMENT, CARTRIDGE TYPE. FUSES SHALL BE THOSE MANUFACTURED BY EITHER BUSSMAN OR LITTLEFUSE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH TO THE OWNER ONE SPARE FUSE FOR EACH SIZE AND TYPE OF FUSE INSTALLED.FUSES 600 AMPS OR LESS SHALL BE CLASS RKI,TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FUSES OVER 600 AMPS SHALL BE CLASS "L". INSTALLATION 1. FUSES SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL EQUIPMENT IS READY TO BE ENERGIZED. 2. PROVIDE AND INSTALL FUSES OF PROPER TYPE, VOLTAGE AND AMPERE RATINGS FOR ALL FUSIBLE DEVICES FURNISHED. 3. LABELS a) APPLY APPROPRIATE LABEL WITHIN EACH SWITCH, MOTOR STARTER, OR PANEL BOARD DOOR OR AT LOCATION NEXT TO FUSE CLIPS, WHERE FUSES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR, FILL-IN IN INK BLANK SPACES ON LABELS FOR NON-STANDARD FUSES WITH APPROPRIATE FUSE DATA. SECTION 16476 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES GENERAL 1. DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE H.P. RATED, GENERAL DUTY, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK TYPE. ENCLOSURES SHALL BE AS REQUIRED BY N.E.C. AND LOCATION (WEATHERPROOF, EXPLOSIONS PROOF, ETC.). ENGRAVED LAMINATED PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION PLATES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ON ALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES, CONTACTORS AND STARTERS. SECTION 16500 - LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES PRODUCTS LUMINAIRES 1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ARE LISTED IN THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. THE DESIGNATIONS INDICATED ON THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ARE A DESIGN SERIES REFERENCE (NOT NECESSARILY A COMPLETE CATALOG NUMBER) AND DO NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT THE NUMBER, SIZE, VOLTAGE, WATTAGE, TYPE OF LAMP, BALLAST, FINISH TRIM, CEILING TYPE, MOUNTING HARDWARE OF SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED HEREINAFTER ON AS REQUIRED BY THE PARTICULAR INSTALLATION(S) AND CODE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THESE REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TO GIVE PROPER INSTALLATION PER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND PER CODES BALLASTS 1. IT IS PREFERRED THAT ALL BALLASTS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. EVERY EFFORT SHALL BE MADE TO ELIMINATE BALLASTS FROM MULTIPLE MANUFACTURERS. BALLASTS WITHIN LUMINAIRES OF A GIVEN TYPE MUST HOWEVER BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER. MULTIPLE MANUFACTURERS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. 2. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS. a) GENERAL ELECTRIC b) MOTOROLA c) MAGNETEK FABRICATION 1. PROVIDE LUMINAIRES, COMPLETE FACTORY -ASSEMBLED AND WIRED AND EQUIPPED WITH NECESSARY SOCKETS, BALLASTS, WIRING, REFLECTORS, CHANNELS, LENSES, ETC., AND DELIVER TO JOB READY FOR INSTALLATION. MATERIALS 1.PROVIDE BALLASTS WITH VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS TO MATCH THAT OF ALL RELATED CIRCUITRY INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. NO EXTRA COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED FOR FAILURE TO PROPERLY COORDINATE BALLAST VOLTAGE WITH CIRCUITRY. 2.13ALLASTS FOR CONTROL OF LAMPS IN ONE HOUSING OR FIXTURE UNIT SHALL NOT CONTROL LAMPS OF AN ADJOINING UNIT. 3. GUARANTEE BALLAST FOR ONE FULL YEAR AND ONE YEAR PRORATED AS PER STANDARD MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTS FOR A PERIOD OF 2 YEARS. GUARANTEE TO INCLUDE REPLACING DEFECTIVE BALLAST WITH NEW BALLAST. LAMPS 1. PROVIDE A COMPLETE SET OF NEW LAMPS IN EACH FIXTURE. 2. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE LAMPS MUST CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING; a) FLUORESCENT: T-8, 35K COLOR. b) INCANDESCENT: "A" LAMPS TO BE c) LOW VOLTAGE MR -16. INSIDE FROSTED RATED AT 130 VOLTS. EXECUTION INSTALLATION 1. INSTALL LUMINAIRES IN MECHANICAL AND UNFINISHED AREAS AFTER DUCTWORK AND PIPING INSTALLATION. ADJUST FIXTURE LOCATIONS TO PROVIDE THE BEST LIGHTING FOR EQUIPMENT ACCESS AND SERVICE LOCATIONS. LOCATE FIXTURES 8'-6" A.F.F, OR AT SUITABLE LOCATIONS WITHIN SPACE ON WALLS BUT NOT LOWER THEN 7'-O" A.F.F. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT LUMINARES FROM DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION OF SAME AND UP TO THE TIME OF ACCEPTANCE. ANY BROKEN LUMINAIRES GLASSWARE PLASTICS LAMPS ETC. MUST BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR WITH NEW PARTS WITHOUT ANY ADDITIONAL PLASTICS, 0 THE OWNER. T ET 3. WHERE BALLASTS ARE FOUND TO BE PRODUCING EXCESSIVE NOISE THEY SHALL BE REPLACED. 4. INSTALL EXIT LIGHT AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS BUT NOT HIGHER THAN 10' A.F.F. SIZE AND COLOR OF LETTERING SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL CODES. 5. TRACK LUMINAIRES, ADJUSTABLE LUMINAIRES, FLOODLIGHTS AND ACCENT LIGHTS SHALL BE AIMED AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. OUTDOOR LIGHTING SHALL BE AIMED IN PERIODS OF DARKNESS. 6. PLUMB ALL OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS TO TRUE VERTICAL. FOR BOLTED POLES, PROVIDE GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS AND NUTS. PLUMB USING A NUT ABOVE AND BELOW THE BASE PLATE ON THE ANCHOR BOLTS. PACK GROUT BETWEEN BASE PLATE AND CONCRETE FOOTING AND PROVIDE DRAIN HOLE BELOW BASE PLATE TO PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF MOISTURE INSIDE POLE BASE. PROVIDE TWO PIECE OR INDIVIDUAL COVERS FOR NUTS EXPOSED ABOVE THE BASEPLATE OF THE SAME COLOR AS THE POLE. GROUND ALL METAL LIGHTING STANDARDS. 7. EMERGENCY LIGHTS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE BRANCH CIRCUIT SUPPLYING NORMAL LIGHTS IN THE SAME AREA WHERE THEY'RE INSTALLED (CONNECTED ON THE LINE SIDE OF ANY SWITCHING ARRANGMENTS) THIS BRANCH CIRCUIT MUST BE IDENTIFIED AT THE PANELBOARD SECTION 16610 - SURGE PROTECTION 1. PROVIDE MOV TYPE LIGHTNING ARRESTER ON THE MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT(S) PER NEC ART. 280 AND CENTRAL FLORIDA LOCAL AMENDMENTS. 2. POWER PANEL SURGE PROTECTORS, WHERE SHOWN ON THE PLANS SHALL BE MOV SINGLE -STAGE TYPE 50,000 KA PER PHASE. EDCO OR EQUAL. 0 4 16 's m S E i 0 a Fn 'I -j u V/N +-ar * o ' , J 5 U zttU Y y`3 m n O • •� 0 U 0n 4i M Q) U U R-( w. 0 U nU N 3 3 O 3 m� M � 1N :2,1- ow L N N C n �� o� C) 0 0� �o =N ON Z'�- am N NO a E001 U 4_0 C � (` N Ea) -a- Ico U) m 34 C� 1 dM C13 L N -o p p 1 0 -Z6 LL UE 3 wa � 22 c s Z:3v o w �'/^� VJ �2 I L. (1)�\ 4_01 c:r W U . - O Q) ♦� V 4- 2 �' M 0- CU v o i a3 1 w � ^+ W c a7 .- I �� Z -1- i J Y- i0 Yb -a J F- U i I Q `fS`S/ O F � I �/ 0li w W s d N . Q iEs *ul b 3t• 3� z Q w � N t•'1 cf 11') •O GD 3 O Z N * Fz o w N (yZp Z Y w I C) w w d �n_ � U E001 MANUFACTURER: SQUARE -D QO MAIN BREAKER: NIA 3 PHASE MAIN LUGS: 400 AMPS 4 WIRE K.A.I.C.: 10 1201208 VOLTS MOUNTED: SURFACE NAME: PANEL PROJECT NAME. GATEWAY MODEL CENTER PROJECT NUMBER: 203424 FED FROM: UTILTY REMER C 0 D E N O CKT ENO S IDENTIFICATION WIPE/GOND C 0 LOADIPHASE (KVA) D E A 8 C BREAKER FTF-TRIP LOAD/PHASE (KVA) A B C C 0 D E WIRE/GOND IDENTIFICATION N CKT 0 N0. T E S 11.15 1 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C R 1.08 0 20 1 1 20 1.20 - -.. L 2#12, 1412G, 112"C EM, EX NL I.IG HTING 2 1 1.00 3 RECEPTACLES 2912, 1#12G, 112"C R ,,`'"' 1,08 T " 20 1 1 20 ' 0.50 = L 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C NL LIGHTING q 1 o 5 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C R _. w- 1.08 20 1 1 20 " 1.15 L 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C LIGHTING 6 ® 7 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G. 1/2"C R 1 26 120 20 1 1 20 1 70 L 2#12, 1#12G, V2"C LIGHTING g 9 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C R ....-.„1 1.08 '.„.�: 20 1 1 20 ,-,) 1.61 .4a` L 2#12, 1#12G, 112"C LIGHTING 10 11 RTU RECEPTACLE 2#12, 1#12G, 172"C R 1.50 20 1 1 20 G - 0.93 L 2#12,1#12G, 112"C LIGHTING 12 13 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G. 112"C R 1.08 '�?,'- -- 20 1 1 20 093 - -: L 2#12, 1#12G, 112"C LIGHTING 14 1. ALL FLUORESCENT 15 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G, 112"C R y 1 08 SHALL BE CONNECTED AHEAD OF LOCAL SWITCHES. 20 1 1 20 0-93 L 2#12, 1#12Q 1l2"C LIGHTING 16 ALL ALTERNATE FIXTURES SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR 17 RECEPTACLES 2912. 1#12G, 1/2"C R ,z. "�_ 0.90 20 1 1 20 - 0.93 L 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C LIGHTING 18 19 RECEPTACLES 2#12. 1412G, 112"C R 036 .. 20 1 1 20 1 61 ,_: L 2#12, 1#12G, 112"C LIGHTING 20 21 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C R w�-" 1 OB;; p'. 20 1 1 20 1 20 1.15 "' `-- 1 1.17 L L 2#12, 1#12G, 1l2"C 2#12 1#12G, , 112"C LIGHTING LIGHTING zz 24 23 25 EWH 2#12, 1#12G, 1!2"C 0 O 0.75 W,�ft 075 20 2 1 20 1 20 t37 ,.�:� ;. 1 37 ""L"�' -1.17 L L 2#12, 1#12G, 1!2"C 2#12, 1#12G, 112C LIGHTING LIGHTING 26 28 27 EWC 2#12, 1#12G, V2"C 0 060 20 1 29 RECEPTACLES 2#12, 1#12G, 112"C R 0.72 20 1 1 20 _ .:]3= L 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C LIGHTING 30 3 31 33 35 RTU -1 (5 -TON) 3#8, 1#10G, 1"C H 5.90 H 2r., H " / 590 '"''qx kz':j' 5.90 50 3 1 20 1.15 y,�'`, L 2#12, 1#12G, 112"C LIGHTING 32 1 20 9 .;".,; 1.61 L 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C LIGHTING 34 1 20 .� : 1.38 L 2#12, 1#12G, V2"C LIGHTING 36 3 37 39 41 RTU -2 (6 -TON) 3#6. 1#BG, 1 1!4"C H 7.35 H 'mar° `t: H t k.„*," 7 35s-." 70 3 1 20 076 L 2#12, 1#12G, 172"C LIGHTING 38 1 20 1.80 ' �`" �" L 2#12, 1#12G, 1/2"C LIGHTING 1 40 ,= 1.52 L 2#12, 1#12G. 112"C LIGHTING 2. VIA TIME CLOCK. PROPOSED UTILITY CO MOUNTED TRANSFORM[ COORDINATE LOCATION UTILITY CO. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. TOTAL KVA PHASE A: 26.51 TOTAL KVA PHASE B: 27.13 TOTAL KVA PHASE C: 28.78 LIGHTING (L RECEPTACLES (R AIC HEATING (H A1C COOLING (C KITCHEN EQUIPENT (K LARGEST MOTOR (M OTHER (0, CONN. ADJUST LOAD(KVA) FACTOR DEMAND FACTOR DEMAND LOAD (KVA? 25.945 1.25 1.00 32.43 12.3 - NEC 11.15 39.738 1.00 1.00 39.738 0 1.00 1 O 0 0 - NEC 0 01.25 B 1.00 0 2.1 -1.00 1.00 2.1 TOTAL CONNECTED KVA'. 82.42 TOTAL CONNECTED AMPS: 228.79 TOTAL DEMAND KVA: 85.42 TOTAL DEMAND AMPS. 237.11 SQUARE FOOT: 2425 LIGHTING DEMAND LOAD IS BASED ON THE LARGER OF THE TWO (CONNECTED VS. TABLE 220.3(e), NEC 1999.) I EXTERIOR j INTERIOR FAULT CURRENT GENERAL NOTES: TRANSFORMER T1 1. FOR A 75 KVA TRANSFORMER WITH A SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF 208 VOLTS, THE AVAILABLE SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT IS LESS THAN 23,167 RMS. SYMMETRICAL AMPERES. (TRANSFORMER IS BASED ON A 2/. IMPEDANCE). 2. ALL SERVICE SWITCHES SHALL HAVE AN A.I.C. RATING OF 100,000 AMPS. 3. PROVIDE DUAL ELEMENT FUSES FOR ALL SERVICE DISCONNECTS. POWER RISER NOTES: 1. LIGHTNING ARRESTOR. 2. 01/0 COPPER CONDUCTING GROUND. SEE GROUNDING ELECTRODE DETAIL ON SHEET E102. 3. 4.350 MCM IN 3" CONDUIT. 4. 4.350 MCM, 103 E.G. IN 3" CONDUIT. 5. 7 -DAY, 4 CIRCUIT PROGRAMMABLE TIME CLOCK, WEATHER PROOF ENCLOSURE, EQUAL TO INTERMATIC •ETZ0415CR. 6. PHOTOCELL K4121 OR EQUIVALENT, FACE NORTH ON ROOF. 7. LIGHTING CONTACTOR CABINET - PROVIDE NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE FOR LIGHTING CONTACTORS. SIZE AS REQUIRED. SEE DETAIL ON SHEET E102. _• ALL WIRING SHALL BE COPPER ONLY. POWER PLAN NOTES: - J -BOX FOR 1.5KW ELECTRICAL WATER HEATER (EWH). COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PLUMBER. O1" CONDUIT LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TYPE SYMBOL TERMINAL CABINET MANUFACTURER CATALOG NO. TELEPONE CONNECTION POINT. VOLT LAMPS MOUNTING A m ON LITHONIA 2SP8 G 4 32 Al2 120 �E�•/_� 120 32W T8 LAY IN ^ B ^, W o POWER METALUX BC -217 120 2F17 SURFACE MOUNTED C CD ® - LITHONIA C 2 32 120 HPF o 120 32W T8 SURFACE MOUNTED D w O N O PORTFOLIO MD7-741E-7710-H-TRM7-P 120 100 W RECESSED E o ® O (D LITHONIA LWM S W 1 R 120 EL N 120 LED -INCLUDED UNIVERSAL EM w LITHONIA ELM2 N 120 INCLUDED WALL F ¢ JUNO R4K3512-W-WH 120 65 W SURFACE MOUNTED TO x GRID TRACK LIGHT (KIT) G Q SPERO WPLS WM-GNI0-SP1 12 -INC -120 G1 WM-G 120 150 W MAX WALL @ T-8" A.F.F. ALTERNATE FIXTURES SHALL BE BY "USI INDUSTRY", "LITHONIA", "THOMAS INDUSTRY" "GENLYTE", "HUBBELL" AND" COOPER INDUSTRY". ALL FIXTURE SUBSTITUTIONS MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL (SEE SPECIFICATIONS). GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL HAVE 4. ALL EMERGENCY, EXIT AND NIGHT LIGHT FIXTURES ENERGY SAVING LAMPS AND BALLASTS. SHALL BE CONNECTED AHEAD OF LOCAL SWITCHES. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. PROVIDE NECESSARY MOUNTING HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES FOR ALL FIXTURES. 5. ALL ALTERNATE FIXTURES SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR PRIOR APPROVAL, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 3. PROVIDE .125 MIN. THICK LENSES FOR FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. POWER PLAN NOTES: - J -BOX FOR 1.5KW ELECTRICAL WATER HEATER (EWH). COORDINATE LOCATION WITH PLUMBER. O1" CONDUIT WITH PULL CORD FROM TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET TO O LON TELEPONE CONNECTION POINT. (TYPICAL) OMOUNT l 1 m ON RTU'S COORDINATE EXACT �E�•/_� LOCATIONS WITH MECHANICAL. (TYPICAL) ®FOR ^ ^, W m POWER REQUIREMENTS TO RTU'S SE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT RISER DIAGRAM. 1 Electrical Lighting Plan SCALE: 1/8" - 1'-0" 0.1 --- - - --- - -.. -- - I 2 Electrical SCALE 1/8" = 1'-0" I P„ Power Plan U U) C Cti3 d 06 C ^t0 LL L W 0 CL J U V Lu U 0 O LON V! l 1 m U �E�•/_� VJ /^T^ !, ^ ^, W m t6M a- tff CD - m' S o "o r' H 0 "o m w U N O w V C z :3 L -+ o C/^, O (D v/ J U Y U U) C Cti3 d 06 C ^t0 LL L W 0 CL J U V Lu L 0 c: l 1 U ? O tff CD O C o m U) H (�u^j^ o -0 w rrnn � O C 0 V U LL a m U U) C Cti3 d 06 C ^t0 LL L W 0 CL J U V Lu E101 b i il I 0 CD o N � O m o Z Y w o ¢ w ELEL N x E101 b i il I I I :I Hf -208424-203424_610,'000-322104 6 25 6E AM MECH. EQUIPMENT POWER RISER DETAIL N.T.S. 1. VERIFY NAMEPLATE RATINGS, LOCATIONS, AND POINT OF POWER CONNECTIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. DO NOT LOCATE DISCONNECT SWITCHES OVER UNIT ACCESS PANELS. 3. PROVIDE A 3/4" EMPTY CONDUIT THROUGH INACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS (I.E. WALLS, UNDER SLAB) FOR CONTROL WIRING. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL PLANS. 4. EQUIP. REQUIREMENTS ARE FOR MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBER LISTED ON MECHANICAL PLANS. THE MECH. CONTRACTOR SHALL BARE ANY ADDITIONAL COST INCURRED IF ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT IS PROVIDED. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL STARTERS FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND SHALL MAKE ALL REQUIRED CONNECTIONS UNLESS STARTERS ARE SPECIFICALLY NOTED ON MECHANICAL PLANS TO BE FACTORY INSTALLED (SEE NOTE 4). (1) 1 1/2" EMPTY CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE TO PROPERTY LINE FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE, COORDINATE WITH LOCAL TELEPHONE CO. FOR EXACT ROUTING AND POINT OF TERMINATION PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. TELEPHONE RISER DIAGRAM N.T.S. 120V. -1 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 120 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR SMOKE DETECTORS PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL. VERIFY WITH MECH. FOR EXACT LOCATION. (TYP.) DISCONNECT - SEE PANEL SCHEDULE V'/ P —WIRE SIZE AND CONDUIT. ROOF TOP UNIT TONS DISCONNECT/ BRK WIRE RE GROUND CONDUIT 5.0 60/3/50 D.E. 3#8 1#10 1" 6.0 100/3/70 D.E. 3#6 1#8 1 1/4" BUILDING STEEL 3/4" x 20' COPPER CLAD GROUND RODS. SERVICE EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL BUS --EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BUS FULL SIZED GROUNDING FULL ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SIZE (PER NEC TABLE 250-66) r-No.4 COPPER \ � MINIMUM rUNDERGROUND WATER PIPE CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE 4 a sem,.• a � GROUND RING No. 6 COPPER MINIMUM ----NOT LARGER THAN CONDUCTOR USED FOR GROUND RING GROUNDING ELECTRODE. CONDUCTOR DETAIL N.T.S. (ARTICLE -250, NEC 1999) NOTES: 1. FULL SIZE GROUND MEANS THAT GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON SERVICE EQUIPMENT ON THE POWER RISER DIAGRAM. 2. AFTER GROUNDING SYSTEM IS INSTALLED, GROUND RESISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED, TO ASSURE THAT GROUND VALUE OF 5 OHM MAXIMUM RESISTANCE IS ACHIEVED. IF NOT, ADDITIONAL GROUNDING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO MEET THE SPECIFIED VALUE, 3. ALL CONNECTIONS TO GROUND RODS SHALL BE EXOTHERMIC WELD CONNECTIONS. 4. GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN OR NEAR BOTTOM OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION OR FOOTING THAT IS IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE EARTH, AND SHALL CONSIST OF AT LEAST 20 FEET OF ONE OR MORE STEEL REINFORCING BARS OR RODS OF NOT LESS THAN 1/2 INCH DIAMETER, OR OF AT LEAST 20 FEET OF BARE COPPER CONDUCTOR. TIME CLOCK ,CLOCK,, IMOTORI N 120 (277) PHOTO CONTROL mas PANEL � CIRCUIT BREAKERS; 0 w 3 -POLE LIGHTING CONTACTOR LIGHTING �- - LOAD 1. TIME CLOCK WITH ISOLATED CONTACTS (IE-INTERMATIC "ET" SERIES) AND PHOTOCONTROLLED CONTACTOR. THIS METHOD OF WIRING MAINTAINS POWER TO THE PHOTOCONTROL AND PREVENTS LIGHTING FROM CYCLING "ON" DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS WHILE PHOTOCONTROL "RESETS'' 2. OVERRIDE (MAINTENANCE) SWITCH 3. TIME CLOCK AND ONE OF THE LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAY BE FED FROM THE SAME SOURCE, IF VOLTAGE IS THE SAME. 4. MATCH CLOCK MOTOR, PHOTOCONTROL AND CONTACTOR COIL TO SYSTEM VOLTAGES. LIGHTING CONTROL DETAIL N.T.S. 0 0 ELECTRICAL LEGEND MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHOWN ARE MAXIMUM/MINIMUM NOT ALL DEVICES SHOWN IN LEGEND ARE REQUIRED. HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS — THEY SHALL REVIEW POWER & LIGHTING PLANS AND DETAILS NOT BE ALTERED WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION. FOR ITEMS WHICH APPLY TO THIS PROJECT. N FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE, LETTER INDICATES TYPE. SEE FIXTURE U N SCHEDULE. LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCH (IF USED) j 4 E FLUORESCENT INDIRECT / DIRECT LIGHT FIXTURE OB INCANDESCENT OR HID LIGHT FIXTURE, LETTER INDICATES TYPE cO G SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TO CONFIRM TYPE AND MOUNTING. FO c LIGHT FIXTURE, LETTERTO INDICATESTYP WA LL ® WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE @w v BRACKHT ET TYPE ANDEMOUNTING. c E] NL LIGHT FIXTURE ON EMERGENCY CIRCUIT/NIGHT LIGHT (NL) @M Z RS LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BE CONNECTED AHEAD OF LOCAL SWITCHES. wfn JUNCTION BOX FOR PADDLE FAN, FLUSH MOUNTED, CAPABLE OF X EXIT LIGHT (SHADE AREA INDICATES DIRECTION) LETTER INDICATES TYPE v SUPPORTING 100 LB. LOAD a SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TO CONFIRM TYPE AND MOUNTING. 0 0 Q BATTERY POWERED EMERGENCY LIGHT Lo DISCONNECT SWITCH E TRACK LIGHTING AND TRACK. FOR INFORMATION ON TRACK DISCONNECT DESIGNATION (SIZE/POLES/FUSE) "NF" INDICATES ' SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TO CONFIRM TYPE AND MOUNTING. 100/3/60 NON-FUSED."DE"INDICATES DUAL ELEMENT FUSES. U`r°_ WALL WASHER FIXTURE. (SHADE AREA INDICATES DIRECTION) SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE TO CONFIRM TYPE AND MOUNTING. EF MOTOR PERMANENTLY CONNECTED WITH FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (HORSEPOWER OR EQUIPMENT INDICATED) SINGLE POLE SWITCH, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES LIGHTS a CONTROLLED. LETTER NOT SHOWN IF SELF EVIDENT. MOUNT EF INCANDESCENT LIGHT, EXHAUST FAN COMBINATION FIXTURE 48" A.F.F. U.O.N. F SINGLE POLE SWITCH. FAN CONTROLLER, MOUNT 48" A.F.F. U.O.N. THERMOSTAT. PROVIDE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 1/2" C. STUBBED INTO CEILING SPACE, MOUNT 60" A.F.F. U.O.N. (COORDINATE WITH 3 3 -WAY SWITCH, FOR CONTROLLING LIGHTS FROM TWO DIFFERENT POINTS. MECHANICAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN) TWO GANG FLOOR OUTLET BOX. ONE QUADPLEX ISOLATED GROUND TELEPHONE WALL OUTLET, PROVIDE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH 3/4" RECEPTACLE AND ONE COMPUTER OUTLET. ♦ CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE TO TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD. MOUNT BOX 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. QUADPLEX FLOOR RECEPTACLE OUTLET. p COMPUTER OUTLET. MOUNT BOX Q 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET. QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER TOP U.O.N. CEILING SPEAKERS MTD. AND WIRED PER AEI MUSIC NETWORK, 0 DUPLEX FLOOR RECEPTACLE OUTLET. O INC. (800-274-9298) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. FIRE ALARM BORN /STROBE PER ADA AND UL 1977 GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLE F 80" AFF TO CENTER OF DEVICE MINIMUM OF 75 BANDALA WATER PROOF EXTERIOR OUTLET P DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT U.O.N. © FIRE ALARM PULL STATION, MOUNTING HEIGHT PER ADA DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, SPLIT -CIRCUIT APPROVED "ABC" FIRE EXTINGUISHER ® R VALENT MIN 2A RATING HRECESS TEXTINGUISHER a DEDICATED AC RECEPTICAL FULLY DFIRE CABINET GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLE, LEVITON #6898-I, MOUNT @__ ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT U.O.N. OS SMOKE DETECTOR Fi] REMOTE M TE T STMSWITCOKE ETECTOR 1. G. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE, LEVITON #5362-IGI MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER HEIGHT. U.O.N. 1. G. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE, LEVITON #5362-IGI O HEAT DETECTOR F5 -V-0 COMMUNICATION OUTLET MOUNT AT 18" A.F.F. U.O.N. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, MOUNTED ABOVE STOREFRONT WINDOWS Q MEDIA BOX O DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM STROBE RANGE OUTLET e SINGLE RECEPTACLE, MOUNTED AT HEIGHT NOTED ON PLANS Q HORN D CLOTHES DRYER OUTLET ® SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE OUTLET JO JUNCTION BOX (FLUSH MOUNT IN FINISHED AREAS U.O.N.) LIGHTING, POWER, FACP PANELBOARD OR TELE. TERM. CABINET. ABBREVIATIONS MSB/MDP MAIN SWITCHBOARD OR MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL EG EQUIPMENT GROUND NL NIGHT LIGHT THREE GANG WALL OUTLET BOX. ONE QUADPLEX RECEPTACLE IG ISOLATED GROUND PC PULL CHAIN �J ONE TELEPHONE JACK AND ONE COMPUTER OUTLET. WP WEATHERPROOF C/T CURRENT TRANSFORMER EC EMPTY CONDUIT EX EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL, BELOW SLAB, OR ABOVE CEILING. EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER AFG ABOVE FINISH GRADE CONDUIT EXPOSED ON WALL OR CEILING. E/F-EF EXHAUST FAN U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED A/H-AHU NR HANDLING UNIT N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT NOT TO EXCEED 6 FEET IN LENGTH ACC -CU CONDENSING UNIT NIC NOT IN CONTRACT RTU ROOF TOP UNIT TYP. TYPICAL AA3 CONDUIT RUN CONCEALED IN WALLS BELOW SLAB, OR CEILING SPACES. FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL VTC VIA TIME CLOCK ARROWS INDICATE HOMERUN. SMALL HASHMARKS INDICATE NUMBER OF LB LOCK BREAKER HOT CONDUCTORS, AND LARGE HASHMARK INDICATES NEUTRAL. GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER SUBSCRIPT INDICATES PANEL AND CIRCUIT NUMBERS. GROUND TTC TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINET CONDUCTOR REQUIRED IN ALL CONDUITS BUT NOT INDICATED. A-37:39:41 SUBSCRIPT INDICATES PANEL -AND NUMBERS WITH COLONS NOTE MOUNTING HEIGHTS NOTED ARE TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE SHOWN. U.O.N. INDICATE 2 OR 3 POLE CIRCUITS, MECH. EQUIPMENT POWER RISER DETAIL N.T.S. 1. VERIFY NAMEPLATE RATINGS, LOCATIONS, AND POINT OF POWER CONNECTIONS PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. 2. DO NOT LOCATE DISCONNECT SWITCHES OVER UNIT ACCESS PANELS. 3. PROVIDE A 3/4" EMPTY CONDUIT THROUGH INACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS (I.E. WALLS, UNDER SLAB) FOR CONTROL WIRING. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL PLANS. 4. EQUIP. REQUIREMENTS ARE FOR MANUFACTURER AND MODEL NUMBER LISTED ON MECHANICAL PLANS. THE MECH. CONTRACTOR SHALL BARE ANY ADDITIONAL COST INCURRED IF ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT IS PROVIDED. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL STARTERS FURNISHED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND SHALL MAKE ALL REQUIRED CONNECTIONS UNLESS STARTERS ARE SPECIFICALLY NOTED ON MECHANICAL PLANS TO BE FACTORY INSTALLED (SEE NOTE 4). (1) 1 1/2" EMPTY CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE TO PROPERTY LINE FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE, COORDINATE WITH LOCAL TELEPHONE CO. FOR EXACT ROUTING AND POINT OF TERMINATION PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. TELEPHONE RISER DIAGRAM N.T.S. 120V. -1 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 120 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR SMOKE DETECTORS PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL. VERIFY WITH MECH. FOR EXACT LOCATION. (TYP.) DISCONNECT - SEE PANEL SCHEDULE V'/ P —WIRE SIZE AND CONDUIT. ROOF TOP UNIT TONS DISCONNECT/ BRK WIRE RE GROUND CONDUIT 5.0 60/3/50 D.E. 3#8 1#10 1" 6.0 100/3/70 D.E. 3#6 1#8 1 1/4" BUILDING STEEL 3/4" x 20' COPPER CLAD GROUND RODS. SERVICE EQUIPMENT NEUTRAL BUS --EQUIPMENT GROUNDING BUS FULL SIZED GROUNDING FULL ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SIZE (PER NEC TABLE 250-66) r-No.4 COPPER \ � MINIMUM rUNDERGROUND WATER PIPE CONCRETE -ENCASED ELECTRODE 4 a sem,.• a � GROUND RING No. 6 COPPER MINIMUM ----NOT LARGER THAN CONDUCTOR USED FOR GROUND RING GROUNDING ELECTRODE. CONDUCTOR DETAIL N.T.S. (ARTICLE -250, NEC 1999) NOTES: 1. FULL SIZE GROUND MEANS THAT GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON SERVICE EQUIPMENT ON THE POWER RISER DIAGRAM. 2. AFTER GROUNDING SYSTEM IS INSTALLED, GROUND RESISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED, TO ASSURE THAT GROUND VALUE OF 5 OHM MAXIMUM RESISTANCE IS ACHIEVED. IF NOT, ADDITIONAL GROUNDING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO MEET THE SPECIFIED VALUE, 3. ALL CONNECTIONS TO GROUND RODS SHALL BE EXOTHERMIC WELD CONNECTIONS. 4. GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN OR NEAR BOTTOM OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION OR FOOTING THAT IS IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE EARTH, AND SHALL CONSIST OF AT LEAST 20 FEET OF ONE OR MORE STEEL REINFORCING BARS OR RODS OF NOT LESS THAN 1/2 INCH DIAMETER, OR OF AT LEAST 20 FEET OF BARE COPPER CONDUCTOR. TIME CLOCK ,CLOCK,, IMOTORI N 120 (277) PHOTO CONTROL mas PANEL � CIRCUIT BREAKERS; 0 w 3 -POLE LIGHTING CONTACTOR LIGHTING �- - LOAD 1. TIME CLOCK WITH ISOLATED CONTACTS (IE-INTERMATIC "ET" SERIES) AND PHOTOCONTROLLED CONTACTOR. THIS METHOD OF WIRING MAINTAINS POWER TO THE PHOTOCONTROL AND PREVENTS LIGHTING FROM CYCLING "ON" DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS WHILE PHOTOCONTROL "RESETS'' 2. OVERRIDE (MAINTENANCE) SWITCH 3. TIME CLOCK AND ONE OF THE LIGHTING CIRCUITS MAY BE FED FROM THE SAME SOURCE, IF VOLTAGE IS THE SAME. 4. MATCH CLOCK MOTOR, PHOTOCONTROL AND CONTACTOR COIL TO SYSTEM VOLTAGES. LIGHTING CONTROL DETAIL N.T.S. 0 0 E a ;•J � J W U Q� +-i v J p a) N U !\J\RI N U N Qa j E 1 1 cO G a-aco U) T N 0 @w v Q c J (U @M Z RS 0-0 wfn w (u o v U IZ a _- 0 0 Q 2l - U U E mL 3 Z � c W U`r°_ m o� E a ;•J � J W L Q� ,q [JO v J p a) U !\J\RI N U Qa j 1 1 cO G -0 N o Q c J (U @ Z RS 0-0 wfn w `o o v U IZ a _- N E a ;•J � J W E102 ,q [JO v J p U !\J\RI N j 1 1 N � Q O N O Z Y Y � w d N O U E102